Acts

Acts front

Introduction to Acts

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

“to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

“in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are: - Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” - Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” - Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” - Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: - Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” - Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.” - Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). - Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” - Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: Textual Variants)

Acts 1

Acts 1 General Notes

Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

Special concepts in this chapter

The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: heaven, sky, heavens, heavenly and resurrection)

Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: baptize, baptized, baptism)

“He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

Acts 1:1

τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην

Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὦ Θεόφιλε

Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.

Θεόφιλε

Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: How to Translate Names)

περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν

Luke is using the word began in an idiomatic way to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (he had been working as a carpenter), but he then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In many languages it would not be necessary to translate the word began. Alternate translation: “about all that Jesus did and taught” (See: Idiom)

περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν

This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 1:2

ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας

While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: Idiom)

ἀνελήμφθη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀνελήμφθη

Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 1:3

οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις

As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”

μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν

This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις

The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων

While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ

See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 1:4

ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: Double Negatives)

ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι

The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: Quote Markings)

Ἱεροσολύμων

Jerusalem is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς

Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου

In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἠκούσατέ

Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: Forms of You)

Acts 1:5

Ἰωάννης

John is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰωάννης

Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ

After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: Metaphor)

ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε

You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and if your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας

Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: Litotes)

Acts 1:6

οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν

In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ

This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: Idiom)

εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ

f your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῷ Ἰσραήλ

Israel is the name of a nation. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 1:7

οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι

Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς

The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: Doublet)

ὁ Πατὴρ

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 1:8

λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες

Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δύναμιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word power, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ

Jerusalem is the name of a city, and Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς

This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: Idiom)

Acts 1:9

βλεπόντων αὐτῶν

Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπήρθη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν

Luke is using the eyes of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 1:10

ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν

Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο

Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ

Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

ἄνδρες δύο

These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς

In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”

Acts 1:11

οἳ…εἶπαν

This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἳ…εἶπαν

If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: Verbs)

ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι

Galileans are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: How to Translate Names)

τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?

The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: Idiom)

ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν

In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky”

ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: Active or Passive)

ὃν τρόπον

Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”

Acts 1:12

ὑπέστρεψαν

The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: Active or Passive)

ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος

Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: Idiom)

Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν

The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 1:13

ὅτε εἰσῆλθον

The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες

In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Πέτρος…Ἰωάννης…Ἰάκωβος…Ἀνδρέας…Φίλιππος…Θωμᾶς…Βαρθολομαῖος…Μαθθαῖος

These are the names of eight men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου

These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: Idiom)

Ἰάκωβος…Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας…Ἰακώβου

These are the names of four men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς

Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/translate-names/01.md)

Acts 1:14

ὁμοθυμαδὸν

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”

γυναιξὶν

Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Μαρία

Mary is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ

These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: Kinship)

Acts 1:15

καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις

Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: Idiom)

ἀναστὰς

Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: Symbolic Action)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: Metaphor)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι

Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: Background Information)

ὄχλος ὀνομάτων

Luke is using the term names figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”

Acts 1:16

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: Metaphor)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

If you decide to retain the metaphor of brothers, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: Information Structure)

ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: Active or Passive)

προεῖπε

Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”

διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ

Peter is using the word mouth figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: Metonymy)

Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα

David and Judas are the names of two men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν

Peter is using the act of guiding the ones who arrested Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 1:17

ὅτι

Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης

These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: Parallelism)

κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν

Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”

κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ἡμῖν

Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης

Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: Quote Markings)

Acts 1:18

μὲν οὖν

Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: Background Information)

οὗτος

Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word unrighteousness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας

Luke is using the term unrighteousness figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

πρηνὴς γενόμενος

Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πρηνὴς γενόμενος

The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”

ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 1:19

γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ

The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”

γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: Hyperbole)

ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἁκελδαμάχ

Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Acts 1:20

γέγραπται γὰρ

Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: Quote Markings)

γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: Active or Passive)

γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” (See: Parallelism)

γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ

The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: Metaphor)

γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation become desolate” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος

The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”

Acts 1:21

To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: Verse Bridges)

ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς

In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς

Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: Idiom)

Acts 1:22

ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word baptism, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Ἰωάννου

John is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in 1:5. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς

While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: Idiom)

ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ

The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν

When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἕνα τούτων

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 1:23

ἔστησαν δύο

The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔστησαν δύο

Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἔστησαν δύο

When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: Symbolic Action)

Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρσαββᾶν…Ἰοῦστος

Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: Active or Passive)

Μαθθίαν

Matthias is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 1:24

Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: Verse Bridges)

προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν

Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: Hendiadys)

προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν

The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: Synecdoche)

σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων

Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”

σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: Metaphor)

σὺ Κύριε

The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Formal or Informal)

ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα

The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 1:25

λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς

The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: Hendiadys)

ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας

The expression turned aside figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: Metaphor)

πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον

This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: Euphemism)

Acts 1:26

καὶ

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς

The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς

The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: Idiom)

συνκατεψηφίσθη

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 2

Acts 2 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.

Special concepts in this chapter

Pentecost

The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.

Tongues

The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.

Last days

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: last day, latter days)

The prophecy of Joel

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess)

Baptize

In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: baptize, baptized, baptism)

Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“You killed” (2:23)

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.

Long sentences

There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

Poetry

The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: Poetry.

Acts 2:1

καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς

Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: Idiom)

ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς

Pentecost is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ

Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”

Acts 2:2

ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.

ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας

Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: Simile)

φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας

Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον

Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: Metaphor)

ὅλον τὸν οἶκον

Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”

οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι

Luke may be using the term sitting idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: Idiom)

Acts 2:3

γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός

This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”

διαμεριζόμεναι

This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”

ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν

The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν

Luke is using the word sat figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 2:4

ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: Metaphor)

ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις

Luke is using the word tongues in one of its specific senses to mean “languages.” Alternate translation: “they began to speak in other languages”

ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις

The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς

Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”

καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς

The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”

Acts 2:5

δὲ

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: Connect — Background Information)

ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς

Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

παντὸς ἔθνους

The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: Hyperbole)

ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: Idiom)

Acts 2:6

συνεχύθη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: Active or Passive)

ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν

The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 2:7

ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον

The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: Doublet)

ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον

The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: Active or Passive)

ἰδοὺ

Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: Metaphor)

οὐχ…ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι

The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Γαλιλαῖοι

See how you translated the name Galileans in 1:11. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 2:8

καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?

The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καὶ

The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος

Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν

The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν

The speakers say figuratively that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 2:9

Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται

These are names of three people groups. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν

These are names of five areas. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 2:10

Φρυγίαν…Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον…Λιβύης

These are names of four areas. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κυρήνην

Cyrene is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι

Here, Romans is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 2:11

Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι

The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”

Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες

These are names of two people groups. (See: How to Translate Names)

γλώσσαις

As in 2:4, here the word tongues has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages”

τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ

The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 2:12

ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο

The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: Doublet)

ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες

These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: Active or Passive)

τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: Idiom)

Acts 2:13

γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: Active or Passive)

γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν

The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

γλεύκους

This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Acts 2:14

σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ

Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: Symbolic Action)

τοῖς ἕνδεκα

Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς

The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες

This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω

This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”

καὶ

Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου

Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 2:15

γὰρ

Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὗτοι

The demonstrative pronoun these refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γὰρ

Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”

ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας

Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Acts 2:16

τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ

The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:17

καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα

The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα

You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

καὶ ἔσται

Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”

ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις

See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.

ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου

God says figuratively that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα

God refers figuratively to flesh to mean people, by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται

If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ὑμῶν

If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οἱ νεανίσκοι…οἱ πρεσβύτεροι

God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 2:18

καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου

If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”

ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις

Here, days idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: Idiom)

ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ…ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου

See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 2:19

καὶ δώσω

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα

Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”

ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω

Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”

ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ

Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: Possession)

Acts 2:20

ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος

God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word darkness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα

Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: Ellipsis)

καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα

If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα

God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: Metaphor)

ἡμέραν…τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ

The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: Doublet)

ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου

This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: Idiom)

ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου

In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Acts 2:21

καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς

Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”

πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: Active or Passive)

πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται

Here, call on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: Idiom)

τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου

God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου

Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου

The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σωθήσεται

This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

Acts 2:22

ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: Idiom)

ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους

Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: Metonymy)

Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον

The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: Active or Passive)

δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις

The terms mighty works, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: Doublet)

Acts 2:23

τοῦτον

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον

The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: Active or Passive)

τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words counsel and foreknowledge, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ

The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀνείλατε

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: Synecdoche)

διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων

Here, hand refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: Metonymy)

ἀνόμων

Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀνόμων

By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: Metonymy)

προσπήξαντες

This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”

Acts 2:24

ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”

ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν

The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: Idiom)

λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου

Peter speaks figuratively of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: Metaphor)

τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου

Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: Possession)

καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: Active or Passive)

κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ

Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: Personification)

Acts 2:25

Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ

In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord always before him, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ

The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord always before him, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γὰρ

Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Δαυεὶδ…λέγει εἰς αὐτόν

Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐνώπιόν μου

The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: Metaphor)

ἐκ δεξιῶν μού

Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐκ δεξιῶν μού

In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: Metaphor)

μὴ σαλευθῶ

Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: Metaphor)

μὴ σαλευθῶ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 2:26

διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου

Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: Metaphor)

ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου

Here, the tongue figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

Here, flesh figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word hope, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: Personification)

καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:27

ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν

These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου

The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Formal or Informal)

οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην

The Messiah says my soul figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: Synecdoche)

οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην

Hades is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν Ὅσιόν σου

The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Ὅσιόν σου

The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν

Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: Idiom)

ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:28

ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου

You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἐγνώρισάς…πληρώσεις…σου

The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Formal or Informal)

ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς

The Messiah speaks figuratively of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: Metaphor)

πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης

The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: Metaphor)

μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου

Here, the word face figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: Metaphor)

μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου

This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: Quote Markings)

Acts 2:29

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ

A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: Metaphor)

ἐτάφη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης

Peter is using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: Idiom)

Acts 2:30

οὖν

Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς

Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ

Peter is using the word loins figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ

When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 2:31

ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ

The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Χριστοῦ

Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ᾍδην

See how you translated the term Hades in 2:27. Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: How to Translate Names)

οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν

Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: Idiom)

οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν

Peter is using the word flesh figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: Metonymy)

οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν

The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:32

ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: Idiom)

ἡμεῖς

By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 2:33

οὖν

Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: Active or Passive)

τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ

Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου

Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: Possession)

τοῦ Πατρὸς

Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐξέχεεν

The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐξέχεεν

Peter says figuratively that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 2:34

λέγει…αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου

The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου

The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ δεξιῶν μου

Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐκ δεξιῶν μου

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:35

ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου

The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: Metaphor)

τῶν ποδῶν σου

This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: Quote Markings)

Acts 2:36

οὖν

Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 2:37

ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: Active or Passive)

κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν

Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν

Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”

κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν

Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: Metaphor)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: Metaphor)

τί ποιήσωμεν

The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 2:38

μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε

The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each. (See: Forms of You)

βαπτισθήτω

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah 2:36. He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So in the name here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: Idiom)

εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 2:39

ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία

Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: Metonymy)

ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν

Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν

Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: Metaphor)

πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν

Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν

By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἂν προσκαλέσηται

Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: Idiom)

Acts 2:40

ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν

Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: Metonymy)

διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς

Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: Hendiadys)

σώθητε

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης

The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης

The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:41

οὖν

Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: End of Story)

ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: Idiom)

τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: Metonymy)

οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: Active or Passive)

ψυχαὶ

Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: Synecdoche)

προσετέθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 2:42

ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words teaching and fellowship, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου

Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Synecdoche)

τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου

By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 2:43

ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος

Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: Personification)

ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος

Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος

Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: Hyperbole)

πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο

Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: Doublet)

Acts 2:44

ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”

εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά

Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 2:45

τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον

The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: Doublet)

καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ

Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν

Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”

Acts 2:46

καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον

See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας

Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words exultation and sincerity, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 2:47

αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν

Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: Hyperbole)

τοὺς σῳζομένους

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”

Acts 3

Acts 3 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“Servant”

Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.

“You killed” (3:15)

For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: repent, repentance)

Important textual issues in this chapter

“the Lord our God” (3:22)

In 3:22, some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: Textual Variants)

Acts 3:1

δὲ

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: Connect — Background Information)

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν ἐνάτην

In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”

τὴν ἐνάτην

If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Acts 3:2

καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: Active or Passive)

καί τις ἀνὴρ

In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: Background Information)

ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ

Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: Metonymy)

τὴν λεγομένην

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: Active or Passive)

Ὡραίαν

Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: How to Translate Names)

εἰς τὸ ἱερόν

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 3:3

ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν

The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 3:4

ἀτενίσας…Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν

This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”

βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς

Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 3:6

ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον

Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: Metonymy)

ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι

What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου

Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: Metonymy)

Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου

The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: How to Translate Names)

περιπάτει

This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

Acts 3:7

πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά

In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 3:8

καὶ

Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς

The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 3:9

πᾶς ὁ λαὸς

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 3:10

ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ…καθήμενος

Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”

τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ

This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ

The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: Doublet)

ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ

Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wonder and amazement, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 3:11

πᾶς ὁ λαὸς

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: Hyperbole)

τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος

This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: How to Translate Names)

τῇ καλουμένῃ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 3:12

ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: Idiom)

τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ

Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?

Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ

By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ

Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: Hendiadys)

Acts 3:13

Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ

These are the names of three men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν

Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν

The term fathers could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν

See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”

παρεδώκατε

Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”

κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου

Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: Idiom)

Πειλάτου

Pilate is the name of a man. His full name was Pontius Pilate. He was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. (See: How to Translate Names)

κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 3:14

δὲ

Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον

Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον

The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: Doublet)

τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον

This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 3:15

ἀπεκτείνατε

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: Synecdoche)

τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς

Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἡμεῖς

Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἡμεῖς

If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 3:16

ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: Information Structure)

τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Peter is using the name of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ

The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην

Peter is speaking of faith figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: Personification)

Acts 3:17

καὶ νῦν

Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.

ἀδελφοί

Peter addresses the people figuratively as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: Metaphor)

ἀδελφοί

Although the term brothers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε

Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν

Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 3:18

ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως

Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: Information Structure)

διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν

Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”

διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν

Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: Metonymy)

πάντων τῶν προφητῶν

Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 3:19

ἐπιστρέψατε

Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: Metaphor)

πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: Active or Passive)

πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας

Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 3:20

ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου

Peter is speaking of these times figuratively as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: Personification)

καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word refreshment, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου

Peter is using the term face figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: Metaphor)

ἀποστείλῃ

Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 3:21

ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι

Peter is speaking figuratively of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: Personification)

ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word restoration, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀπ’ αἰῶνος

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: Idiom)

διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν

Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 3:22

Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Μωϋσῆς

Moses is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν

See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading or one of two other possible readings, “The Lord your God” or “The Lord God.” (See: Textual Variants)

Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν

Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει

Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: Idiom)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν

Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: Metaphor)

αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα

Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: Idiom)

Acts 3:23

ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Active or Passive)

πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ

Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις

Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: Synecdoche)

ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: Idiom)

Acts 3:24

πάντες…οἱ προφῆται

Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: Hyperbole)

ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς

Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”

Σαμουὴλ

Samuel is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας

Peter is using the word days idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: Idiom)

τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας

Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 3:25

ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν

Peter is using the word sons figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: Metonymy)

οἱ υἱοὶ

Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν

The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: Metonymy)

πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν

Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν

Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου

The term seed figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου

As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: Active or Passive)

πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς

Here, families refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 3:26

ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν

The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: Idiom)

τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ

See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”

τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν

Here, turning someone from something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: Metaphor)

τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wickedness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 4

Acts 4 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

Special concepts in this chapter

Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

“Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: Metaphor and faith)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.

Acts 4:1

λαλούντων…αὐτῶν

The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ

The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι

Sadducees is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι

The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι

Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 4:2

διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς

The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 4:3

καὶ

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας

The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας

The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: Metonymy)

ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word custody, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη

The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:4

δὲ

Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: End of Story)

τὸν λόγον

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν

Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε

The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:5

ἐγένετο δὲ

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς

Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς

The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

συναχθῆναι

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 4:6

Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας

Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης…Ἀλέξανδρος

These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ

Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”

Acts 4:7

στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο

The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?

The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: Doublet)

ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι

Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: Metonymy)

ὑμεῖς

Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.) (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

Acts 4:8

Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: Active or Passive)

Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν

Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: Metaphor)

ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι

Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: Merism)

τοῦ λαοῦ

Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:9

εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται

Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: Irony)

ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: Active or Passive)

οὗτος σέσωσται

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 4:10

γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ

The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “then we want you and all the people of Israel to know” (See: Active or Passive)

πᾶσιν ὑμῖν

The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι

Here, name refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: Metonymy)

Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου

See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: How to Translate Names)

ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε

It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: Synecdoche)

ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: Idiom)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 4:11

οὗτός

The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας

Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: Metaphor)

ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: Active or Passive)

κεφαλὴν γωνίας

The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: Idiom)

Acts 4:12

οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: Double Negatives)

οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς

Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: Metonymy)

ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν

This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: Idiom)

ἐν ἀνθρώποις

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡμᾶς

Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 4:13

θεωροῦντες

Luke is using the word seeing idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: Idiom)

τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου

Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καταλαβόμενοι

The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν

Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται

The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: Doublet)

Acts 4:14

τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: Active or Passive)

σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον

The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν

The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:15

κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους

The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦ Συνεδρίου

Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοῦ Συνεδρίου

Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 4:16

τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?

This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: Rhetorical Question)

πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ

This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: Hyperbole)

γνωστὸν σημεῖον

Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”

Acts 4:17

ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: Active or Passive)

ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ

By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπὶ πλεῖον

Alternate translation: “any further”

λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ

Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων

In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: Double Negatives)

μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων

Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 4:18

καὶ

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν

The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν

The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: Doublet)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 4:19

ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον

Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: Hendiadys)

ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον

This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: Metonymy)

ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: Idiom)

Acts 4:20

γὰρ

Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἡμεῖς…εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν

Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐ δυνάμεθα…ἡμεῖς…μὴ λαλεῖν

You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: Double Negatives)

Acts 4:21

οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς

The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

διὰ τὸν λαόν

The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν

Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 4:22

ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως

In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: Background Information)

γὰρ

Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως

Luke is speaking figuratively as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: Personification)

τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως

Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: Possession)

Acts 4:23

ἀπολυθέντες

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: Active or Passive)

ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους

In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: Go and Come)

τοὺς ἰδίους

The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι

As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: Merism)

Acts 4:24

οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἦραν

The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἦραν φωνὴν

Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”

ἦραν φωνὴν

The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: Idiom)

ὁμοθυμαδὸν

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”

σὺ

The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Formal or Informal)

ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς

The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: Merism)

τὸν οὐρανὸν

The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”

Acts 4:25

ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών

The word mouth refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?

As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the Gentiles raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἡμῶν

The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τοῦ πατρὸς

Here, father figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: Metaphor)

παιδός

The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.

ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά

Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the Gentiles rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: Ellipsis)

ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the Gentiles rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: Parallelism)

ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?

In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The Gentiles should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἔθνη

Gentiles is the name for people groups that are not Jewish. (See: How to Translate Names)

κενά

The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:26

παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ

This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ

In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: Parallelism)

παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: Idiom)

οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ

See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.

τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ

Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 4:27

Ἡρῴδης

Herod is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: How to Translate Names)

Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος

This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name Pilate in 3:13. (See: How to Translate Names)

συνήχθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ

The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παῖδά

Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”

ὃν ἔχρισας

In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 4:28

ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι

Here, hand figuratively means God’s power and counsel figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: Metonymy)

ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι

The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: Hendiadys)

ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι

The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: Personification)

Acts 4:29

καὶ τὰ νῦν

The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.

ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν

The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: Idiom)

τοῖς δούλοις σου

The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

τὸν λόγον σου

The believers are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 4:30

ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι

Here the hand figuratively represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: Metonymy)

σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: Doublet)

διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος

Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ

Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”

Acts 4:31

καὶ

This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: End of Story)

ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐσαλεύθη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος

Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: Metonymy)

μετὰ παρρησίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 4:32

δὲ

Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: Connect — Background Information)

ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία

Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Metonymy)

ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία

The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: Doublet)

τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”

ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά

The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 4:33

τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς

The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word grace, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 4:34

οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς

This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For. (See: Verse Bridges)

γὰρ

Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

γὰρ

Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: Hyperbole)

τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 4:35

ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων

The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they got on the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/translate-symaction/01.md)

ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων

In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: Symbolic Action)

διεδίδετο

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: Active or Passive)

ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word need, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 4:36

Ἰωσὴφ δὲ

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς

Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως

Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

υἱὸς παρακλήσεως

The expression Son of figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: Idiom)

υἱὸς παρακλήσεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word Encouragement, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Λευείτης

The name Levite describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κύπριος

Cyprus is the name of an island. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 4:37

ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ

See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”

ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων

See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 5

Acts 5 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)

No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Long sentences

Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

Acts 5:1

ἀνὴρ δέ τις

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἁνανίας

Ananias is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ

Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Σαπφείρῃ

Sapphira is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 5:2

ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς

The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, and you could say why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι…ἔθηκεν

It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”

παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν

This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: Idiom)

Acts 5:3

διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?

Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου

Peter is speaking figuratively of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν καρδίαν σου

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: Metaphor)

ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου

Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: Order of Events)

ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον

Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς

The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretendng that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:4

οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?

Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἔμενεν

Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”

πραθὲν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν

The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν

The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?

Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: Metaphor)

τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?

Peter speaks figuratively of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ

Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: Metonymy)

ἀνθρώποις

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 5:5

ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους

Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: Metonymy)

πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν

The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: Euphemism)

πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν

Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: Order of Events)

ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας

Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: Personification)

Acts 5:6

ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν

Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: Idiom)

οἱ νεώτεροι

This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν

It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Acts 5:7

ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: Idiom)

ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ

The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸ γεγονὸς

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:8

ἀπεκρίθη…πρὸς αὐτὴν

The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”

ἀπέδοσθε

Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

τοσούτου…ναί, τοσούτου

This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:9

τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?

Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑμῖν…σου…σε

The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: Forms of You)

πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου

Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”

πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου

Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: Metonymy)

ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες

Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ

Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: Metonymy)

οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ

Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε

The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:10

ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν

The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: Euphemism)

ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν

Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: Order of Events)

ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ

This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: Metonymy)

οἱ νεανίσκοι

See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:11

καὶ

This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: End of Story)

ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα

Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: Personification)

Acts 5:12

δὲ

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: Connect — Background Information)

διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ

Luke is using the hands of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: Metonymy)

σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα

The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: Doublet)

ἦσαν…πάντες

The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὁμοθυμαδὸν

The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”

τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος

This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 5:13

τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς

The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:14

προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ

Luke says the Lord figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: Metonymy)

προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 5:15

ὥστε

Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐκφέρειν

The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς

Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων

The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: Doublet)

ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν

The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν

Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”

Acts 5:16

ἀσθενεῖς

See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: Active or Passive)

οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: Active or Passive)

οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες

It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 5:17

δὲ

Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,

The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: Order of Events)

ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀναστὰς

Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: Idiom)

πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων

The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word jealousy, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου

Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 5:18

ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους

The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους

The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 5:19

ἐξαγαγών…αὐτοὺς

The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 5:20

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης

The angel is using the term words figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: Metonymy)

τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης

Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”

Acts 5:21

ἀκούσαντες

Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: Idiom)

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον

The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δὲ

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

παραγενόμενος

This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ

The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ

Here, sons figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον

Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 5:23

τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word security, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀνοίξαντες

Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν

By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 5:24

τοὺς λόγους τούτους

Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: Metonymy)

περὶ αὐτῶν

The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: Idiom)

Acts 5:25

ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες

This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: Metaphor)

ἔθεσθε

Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: Forms of You)

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:26

τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν

The first instance of them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 5:27

ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς

The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 5:28

παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν

For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”

ὑμῖν…πεπληρώκατε…ὑμῶν…βούλεσθε

In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: Forms of You)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ

Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε

The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: Metaphor)

πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν

The high priest is speaking figuratively of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: Metaphor)

βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς

The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: Metaphor)

ἡμᾶς

By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὸ αἷμα

The high priest is using the term blood figuratively to mean death, by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου

The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:29

ἀποκριθεὶς…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν

Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: Hendiadys)

Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν

Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνθρώποις

Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 5:30

τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν

Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν

Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν

As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: Idiom)

ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε

The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: Forms of You)

ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε

It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: Synecdoche)

κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου

The word translated as tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: Metonymy)

κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου

In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:31

τοῦτον

Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ

Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ

God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: Symbolic Action)

τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Ἰσραὴλ

Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: Personification)

Acts 5:32

ἡμεῖς

Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ

Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: Ellipsis)

ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ

Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:33

οἱ…ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς

The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 5:34

τις…Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Φαρισαῖος

The name Pharisee describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: How to Translate Names)

Γαμαλιήλ

Gamaliel is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ

Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: Background Information)

τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: Active or Passive)

τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ

The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: Hyperbole)

ἀναστὰς

Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω…τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι

Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

βραχὺ

Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 5:35

τε

Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται

This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: Idiom)

προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν

Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 5:36

πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν

Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: Idiom)

Θευδᾶς

Theudas is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀνέστη

In this context, rose up figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: Metaphor)

λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: Idiom)

ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: Active or Passive)

ὃς ἀνῃρέθη

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: Active or Passive)

διελύθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν

Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”

Acts 5:37

μετὰ τοῦτον

Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος

Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀνέστη

As in 5:36, rose up here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς

Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: Idiom)

ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ

Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: Idiom)

κἀκεῖνος

Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: Active or Passive)

διεσκορπίσθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 5:38

καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν

Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.

καὶ

Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς

When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”

ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο

Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”

ἀνθρώπων

Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

καταλυθήσεται

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 5:39

δὲ

Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν

Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μήποτε

It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: Active or Passive)

εὑρεθῆτε

The expression be found is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 5:40

καὶ

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν

The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: Synecdoche)

λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 5:41

ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου

Luke is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: Metaphor)

κατηξιώθησαν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος

Here, the Name figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 5:42

τε

Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: End of Story)

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι

Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: Litotes)

Acts 6

Acts 6 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“His face was like the face of an angel”

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.

Acts 6:1

ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις

Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις

Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: Idiom)

τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν

Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς Ἑβραίους

In this context, Luke is using the name Hebrews to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: How to Translate Names)

παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word service, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 6:2

δὲ

Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οἱ δώδεκα

Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οἱ δώδεκα

Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: How to Translate Names)

καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: Metonymy)

διακονεῖν τραπέζαις

To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 6:3

ἀδελφοί

See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: Metaphor)

ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους

The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: Active or Passive)

πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας

The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: Metaphor)

πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης

When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 6:4

τοῦ λόγου

The apostles are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 6:5

ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους

Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον

These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: Metaphor)

ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Ἀντιοχέα

The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 6:6

προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας

This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: Order of Events)

ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας

The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 6:7

As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: End of Story)

ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν

Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: Metonymy)

ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει

Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: Synecdoche)

ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 6:8

Στέφανος δὲ

Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει

Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: Metaphor)

Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει

Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: Hendiadys)

Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words grace and power, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: Doublet)

Acts 6:9

ἀνέστησαν

Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: Idiom)

τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων

The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας

Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 6:10

οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι

The expression stand against is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: Idiom)

τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει

Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: Hendiadys)

τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 6:11

ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας

The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀκηκόαμεν

The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα

The men are using the term words figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: Metonymy)

Μωϋσῆν

Moses is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 6:12

συνεκίνησάν

In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in 6:9. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς

Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: Metaphor)

Συνέδριον

Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in 4:14. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 6:13

οὐ παύεται λαλῶν

If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: Double Negatives)

λαλῶν ῥήματα

The men are using the term words figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου

The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 6:14

ὁ Ναζωραῖος

The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν τόπον τοῦτον

By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς

The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 6:15

εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου

Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: Simile)

Acts 7

Acts 7 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in 6:13–14. Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin. - (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him - (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses - (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law - (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave - (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built - (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build - (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members - (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.

A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

Special concepts in this chapter

“Stephen said”

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

“Full of the Holy Spirit”

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in 7:58, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: Metonymy)

Important textual issues in this chapter

“a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)

In 7:46, some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: Textual Variants)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.

Acts 7:1

ὁ ἀρχιερεύς

Luke assumes that his readers will know that the high priest was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:2

ὁ δὲ ἔφη

The pronoun he refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες

Men, brothers and fathers is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: Idiom)

ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες

Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word fathers figuratively to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun glory with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης

Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in 6:11 that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the God of glory acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμῶν

Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word our to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ

Stephen is using the term father figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: Metaphor)

Μεσοποταμίᾳ…Χαρράν

Mesopotamia is the name of a region, and Harran is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 7:3

εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν

The pronoun he refers to God, while the pronoun him refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 7:4

κατῴκησεν…αὐτοῦ…μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν

The pronouns his and him and the first instance of he refer to Abraham, while the second instance of he refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γῆς Χαλδαίων

Chaldeans is the name of a people group. This group lived in Mesopotamia, so as 7:2 indicates, Abraham had been living among these people. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὑμεῖς

The word you is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listenting to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: Forms of You)

Acts 7:5

οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐπηγγείλατο…αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ…αὐτόν…οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ

The pronouns him and his and the third instance of he refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of he refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ

Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”

οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός

This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν

The term seed figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: Metaphor)

αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun possession with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 7:6

ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν

Stephen is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun stranger and the singular pronoun him. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun them. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 7:7

καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ

If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τὸ ἔθνος

Here, nation refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: Metonymy)

ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν

As in 7:6, Stephen is using the singular pronoun him because he is using the singular word seed figuratively to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 7:8

ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐγέννησεν

The first instance of he refers to God, while the word him and the second instance of he refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς

Stephen’s listeners would have known that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ

Isaac and Jacob are the names of two men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ

These are the names of two men. (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: Ellipsis)

τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word patriarchs to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:9

οἱ πατριάρχαι

Here the word patriarchs refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: Kinship)

τὸν Ἰωσὴφ

Joseph is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον

Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Αἴγυπτον

Egypt is the name of a place. See how you translated it in 2:9. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ

When Stephen says that God was with Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: Idiom)

Acts 7:10

ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ

In these phrases the word he refers to God and the words him and his refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ

If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns favor and wisdom with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐναντίον Φαραὼ

Here the phrase before Pharaoh may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: Idiom)

ἐναντίον Φαραὼ

The phrase before Pharaoh could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion, by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: Metonymy)

κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ

In these phrases the words he and his refer to Pharaoh and the word him refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον

The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ

The word household refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 7:11

ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη

Here, Stephen speaks figuratively of famine and tribulation as if they came to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: Personification)

Χανάαν

Canaan is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:12

ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον

Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον

By first, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν

Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:13

ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ

Stephen is using the adjective second as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds time to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ

If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: Active or Passive)

φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ

The phrase became known is not actually a passive from in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 7:14

ἀποστείλας…Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ

Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε

Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: Idiom)

Acts 7:15

κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον

Stephen says that Jacob went down because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: Idiom)

ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they died as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:16

μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: Active or Passive)

Συχὲμ

Shechem is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

τιμῆς ἀργυρίου

In biblical times, people used silver as money. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: Biblical Money)

τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ

Hamor is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 7:17

καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη

In your language it may be helpful to say that the people increased and multiplied before saying that the time of the promise approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: Order of Events)

καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ

Stephen is speaking figuratively of this time as if it were a person and could have approached on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: Personification)

καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ

Stephen is referring to the promise that he described in 7:7. God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη

Stephen is using the two words increased and multiplied together to express a single idea. The word multiplied tells in what way the people increased. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: Hendiadys)

Acts 7:18

ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον

When Stephen says that this next king arose, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον

The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ

Stephen is not saying that this king did not know Joseph personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 7:19

οὗτος

He refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοὺς πατέρας

Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς πατέρας

Although the term fathers is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by exposed he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι

Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the verb keep alive, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: Double Negatives)

Acts 7:20

ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ

Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς

Here Stephen introduces Moses into his story. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: Active or Passive)

ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ

This could mean: (1) that Moses was beautiful in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very beautiful. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: Idiom)

ὃς ἀνετράφη…ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you can make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 7:21

ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ

Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν

This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus 2:1-10.) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:22

ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: Active or Passive)

πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων

Stephen says all as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: Hyperbole)

δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”

Acts 7:23

ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: Idiom)

ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: Active or Passive)

ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ

The phrase it came up on his heart is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: Idiom)

ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ

Here, heart is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: Metonymy)

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ

Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ

Although the terms brothers and sons are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 7:24

ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Egyptian who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: Active or Passive)

πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:25

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: Metaphor)

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Although the term brothers is masculine, Stephen is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ

Here, hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 7:26

αὐτοῖς

It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτοῖς…αὐτοὺς…ἐστε…ἀδικεῖτε

Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of them and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἄνδρες

This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: Idiom)

ἀδελφοί

Moses is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: Metaphor)

ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?

Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 7:27

αὐτὸν

The word him refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?

The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν

In this context, the words ruler and judge mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: Doublet)

ἡμῶν

The man is using the word our to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 7:28

μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον

The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding do you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: Double Negatives)

μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?

The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ὃν τρόπον

Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”

Acts 7:29

ἔφυγεν…Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ

The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ

Stephen is using the term word figuratively to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: Metonymy)

Μαδιάμ

Midian is the name of a country. (See: How to Translate Names)

οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:30

πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα

This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: Idiom)

πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα

Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: Active or Passive)

ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος

The word appeared does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: Idiom)

ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος

Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:31

ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses admired the sight because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου

Stephen is speaking figuratively of the voice of the Lord as if it were a person and that it came on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: Personification)

Acts 7:32

ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Acts 7:33

εἶπεν…αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν

In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: Symbolic Action)

λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου

The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου

Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of sandals. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”

ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν

The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:34

ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον.

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἰδὼν, εἶδον

Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb seen is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: Idiom)

τοῦ λαοῦ μου

God uses the possessive word my to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: Possession)

κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς

God describes himself as having come down from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means figuratively that he is taking action to rescue them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ

God is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

νῦν δεῦρο

God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον

God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says let me send you to Egypt. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

Acts 7:35

τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν

Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says This Moses, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: Litany)

εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in 7:27. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?

See how you translated this rhetorical question in 7:27. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν

See how you translated the combination of ruler and judge in 7:27. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: Doublet)

λυτρωτὴν

In this context, the word translated redeemer refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”

σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου

Here, hand is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: Metonymy)

ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ

See how you translated the word appeared in 7:30. Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: Idiom)

Acts 7:36

τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα

The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: Doublet)

Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ

Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, the Red Sea, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 7:37

ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ

Stephen is using the word sons figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: Metaphor)

προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει…ὡς ἐμέ

Here, the expression raise up describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: Idiom)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν

Stephen is using the word brothers figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:38

οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ

This is the one refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα

It might be more natural to put the information about Mount Sinai next to the information about Moses receiving living words. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: Information Structure)

τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο

This second instance of who in the verse refers to Moses, not to the fathers. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα

It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the words that he received. Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λόγια ζῶντα

Stephen is using the term words to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: Metonymy)

λόγια ζῶντα

Stephen is using the term living figuratively to describe God’s words as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:39

ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

The word whom refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀπώσαντο

Stephen is speaking figuratively to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: Metaphor)

ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον

Here, hearts is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 7:40

εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ.

If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”

τῷ Ἀαρών

Aaron is the name of a man, the older brother of Moses. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ

It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: Information Structure)

Acts 7:41

ἐμοσχοποίησαν

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this image of a calf was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as the idol later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις

Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: Idiom)

ἐμοσχοποίησαν

The pronoun they refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν

Stephen describes what he also calls the calf and the idol as the works of their hands, by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 7:42

ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς

Stephen is speaking figuratively as if God had physically turned away. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: Metaphor)

τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Here, the word host means “army,” and the word heaven means “sky.” Stephen is speaking figuratively of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: Metaphor)

γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: Active or Passive)

βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν

This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ

This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: Quote Markings)

μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?

The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding did you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: Double Negatives)

μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?

Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of Israel that they did not really worship Him in the wilderness with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 7:43

καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.

The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.

Acts 7:42

μὴ…προσηνέγκατέ

You is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (house) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular you in your translation. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

σφάγια καὶ θυσίας

In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (slain beasts) and those that are bloodless (offerings), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: Merism)

οἶκος Ἰσραήλ

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:43

καὶ

And at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, 7:42: “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἀνελάβετε…μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς

The term took up indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term remove in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: Irony)

ἀνελάβετε…ὑμῶν…ἐποιήσατε…ὑμᾶς

As in 7:42, you is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse your is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ

The tabernacle of Molech was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν

The Israelites were not carrying around an actual star, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε

The word images refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ

Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated and to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Acts 7:44

Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.

Acts 7:43

μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος

This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: Quote Markings)

Acts 7:44

ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ

Stephen is not saying that the tabernacle was with the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built according to the pattern that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: Ellipsis)

ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου

Stephen calls this tent the tabernacle of the testimony by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: Metonymy)

καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει

It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: Information Structure)

διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the pattern for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:45

ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

The pronoun which refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors and they brought it in”

διαδεξάμενοι

The phrase having received … in turn translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”

εἰσήγαγον…μετὰ Ἰησοῦ

When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle with Joshua, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”

εἰσήγαγον

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰησοῦ

Joshua is the name of a man, the successor of Moses as leader of the Israelites. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν

Stephen is using the term nations to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: Metonymy)

ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν

Stephen is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: Metaphor)

ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: Ellipsis)

τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ

Stephen is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: Idiom)

Acts 7:46

εὑρεῖν

Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: Idiom)

Acts 7:45

Δαυείδ

David is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:16. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 7:46

ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ

The pronoun who refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”

ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: Metonymy)

εὑρεῖν

Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: Idiom)

σκήνωμα

The word dwelling refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word figuratively to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a temple” (See: Metaphor)

τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ

See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use the reading the house of Jacob or another possible reading, “the God of Jacob.” (See: Textual Variants)

τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ

Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Jacob figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 7:47

Σολομῶν

Solomon is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 3:11. (See: How to Translate Names)

αὐτῷ οἶκον

Stephen is using the word house figuratively to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: Metaphor)

αὐτῷ οἶκον

The pronoun him refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 7:48

ὁ Ὕψιστος

This is a respectful title for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning.

χειροποιήτοις

Stephen is using the adjective made with hands (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds houses to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

χειροποιήτοις

Stephen is using the word hand, one part of a person, figuratively to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: Synecdoche)

χειροποιήτοις

The word houses figuratively means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: Metaphor)

καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by the prophet, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:49

ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου

This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: Quote Markings)

ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου

Speaking through Isaiah, God figuratively describes Heaven as his throne and the earth as his footstool. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου

God is using the two parts of creation, Heaven and earth, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: Merism)

ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?

God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: Parallelism)

ποῖον οἶκον

The word house figuratively means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: Metaphor)

τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 7:50

οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?

This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: Quote Markings)

οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?

God is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express its meaning as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?

God is using one part of himself, his hand, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: Synecdoche)

ταῦτα πάντα

The phrase all these things refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”

Acts 7:51

σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν

Stephen is using the exclamatory word O to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative O. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: Exclamations)

σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ

Stephen is using the adjective stiff-necked as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

σκληροτράχηλοι

Stephen is speaking figuratively of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν

Stephen speaks figuratively of the Sanhedrin members’ heart and ears as uncircumcised by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: Metonymy)

ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν

Stephen is using one part of a person, the heart, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν

Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the ears, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: Synecdoche)

ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε

The word always is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: Hyperbole)

ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς

The words you and your are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: INVALID translate/figs-youplural)

ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς

Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 7:52

τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?

Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?

Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: Hyperbole)

τοῦ Δικαίου

Stephen is using the adjective Righteous as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds One to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε

It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”

Acts 7:53

οἵτινες ἐλάβετε

The pronoun who refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οἵτινες ἐλάβετε

The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive the law themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them figuratively to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: Synecdoche)

εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων

Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in 7:38 that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 7:54

ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: Active or Passive)

διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Here, the expression they were cut to their hearts is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: Idiom)

ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν

This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 7:55

πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: Metaphor)

ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν

The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δόξαν Θεοῦ

The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Luke is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” at the right of God. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 7:56

ἰδοὺ

Stephen is using the term behold to focus his listener’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: Metaphor)

θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ

Stephen is speaking figuratively of the heavens being opened to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you translated the nominal adjective right in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase at the right of God in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus standing in 7:55. Alternate translation: “, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 7:57

κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν

The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: Symbolic Action)

κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ

This is an idiom that suggests figuratively that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: Idiom)

κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ

If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”

ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν

This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”

Acts 7:58

ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως

Luke is likely speaking figuratively when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members throwing Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ μάρτυρες

These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in 6:13. According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου

The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ἱμάτια

These outer garments were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: Translate Unknowns)

παρὰ τοὺς πόδας

The expression at the feet is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: Idiom)

Σαύλου

Saul is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 7:59

ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα

This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase calling out tells how Stephen was saying what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: Hendiadys)

δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

Acts 7:60

θεὶς…τὰ γόνατα

Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a revernt posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ

This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: Idiom)

μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν

If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold … against. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: Double Negatives)

ἐκοιμήθη

Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says he fell asleep. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: Euphemism)

Acts 8

Acts 8 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”

Special concepts in this chapter

Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

Proclaimed

This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.

Acts 8:1

Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ

Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in 8:3 and in chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: Connect — Background Information)

ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν

Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ

Here, day is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πάντες…διεσπάρησαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: Active or Passive)

πάντες…διεσπάρησαν

The word all is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: Hyperbole)

τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας

Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. See how you translated them in 1:8. (See: How to Translate Names)

πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων

The implication is that the apostles remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:2

συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ

It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: Verse Bridges)

συνεκόμισαν…τὸν Στέφανον

The word translated carried away means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:3

κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους

Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”

κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους… τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας

Luke may mean houses where Christians met, as described in 2:46, and he means men and women who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met…believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:4

οἱ…διασπαρέντες

Luke is using the participle having been scattered, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οἱ…διασπαρέντες

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated it in 8:1. Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: Active or Passive)

εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in 4:4. Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated proclaiming here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:5

Φίλιππος

Philip is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 1:13. Philip was one of the apostles. A man by that same name, possibly the same man, was chosen as one of the deacons in 6:5. (See: How to Translate Names)

κατελθὼν

Luke speaks of Philip going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: Idiom)

τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας

This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: Idiom)

τὸν Χριστόν

Luke is using the name Christ figuratively by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:6

οἱ ὄχλοι

Luke implicitly means the crowds in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁμοθυμαδὸν

Alternate translation: “all together”

τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου

Luke is using the participle being spoken, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰ σημεῖα

Here the word signs has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”

Acts 8:7

πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο

As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had unclean spirits being the subject of the sentence to the unclean spirits themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: Information Structure)

τῶν ἐχόντων

Luke is using the participle having, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term those to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα

Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”

βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ

This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: Idiom)

πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in 4:10. Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: Active or Passive)

πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι

Luke is using the participle * having been paralyzed* as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:8

δὲ

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ

The phrase that city refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: Metonymy)

ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 8:9

ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων

Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: Background Information)

ἀνὴρ…τις ὀνόματι Σίμων

Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Σίμων

Simon is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in 1:13.

Acts 8:10

ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου

The phrase to whom refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πάντες

Luke is using the word all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: Hyperbole)

ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου

Luke is using the adjectives little and great as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου

Luke is speaking figuratively, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: Merism)

οὗτός

The demonstrative pronoun This stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη

The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: How to Translate Names)

ἡ καλουμένη

If your language does not use the passive form called, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:11

προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ

This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: INVALID translatewriting-background)

Acts 8:12

ἐπίστευσαν

The pronoun they refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title Christ indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: Metonymy)

εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Since Jesus inaugurated the kingdom of God when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: Information Structure)

ἐβαπτίζοντο

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:13

ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν

Luke uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ

Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”

βαπτισθεὶς

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: Active or Passive)

θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας

The word that ULT translates as works here is the same word that it translates as “power” in 8:10. It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that works of power that are truly great are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: Irony)

τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις

The terms signs and works mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: Doublet)

Acts 8:14

δὲ

Luke is using the word translated And to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἡ Σαμάρεια

Luke is using the word Samaria figuratively by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Πέτρον καὶ Ἰωάννην

Peter and John are the names of two men. See how you translated them in 1:13. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 8:15

οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν

The pronoun who stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οἵτινες

Since the pronoun who stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

καταβάντες

Luke speaks of Philip having come down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: Idiom)

καταβάντες

Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 8:16

οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός

Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: Metaphor)

γὰρ

Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐδέπω…ἦν…ἐπιπεπτωκός

The pronoun he stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

Here, the name of the Lord Jesus represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:17

ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον

The first instance of the pronoun they stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them and the second instance of they stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπετίθεσαν

Since this instance of the pronoun they stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in 8:18 and “they” and “the ones” in 8:25. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς

Peter and John laying their hands on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: Symbolic Action)d John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 8:18

δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:19

δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον

Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”

Acts 8:20

τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν

Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: Exclamations)

τὸ ἀργύριόν

Peter is referring figuratively to money, by association with the way that silver was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: Metonymy)

τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Peter is referring figuratively to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it the gift of God. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:21

οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ

The terms part and share mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: Doublet)

σοι

The phrase to you represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: Possession)

ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: Metaphor)

ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ

This could mean: (1) that Simon’s heart is not right in God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:22

ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wickedness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: Metaphor)

δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου

Peter is using the conditional word if to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:23

εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας

The gall plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: Translate Unknowns)

εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας

Peter is using the gall plant figuratively by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας

Peter is describing bitterness figuratively as if it were made of gall or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: Metaphor)

σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας

Peter speaks figuratively of the bond of unrighteousness as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 8:24

ὑμεῖς…εἰρήκατε

Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as 8:18 describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, You and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Dual/Plural)

δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον

This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον

Simon is stating the pronoun You, which is already implied in the verb pray, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε

Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”

μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε

Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:25

οὖν

Luke is using the word translated Then to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

The ones Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες

Luke is using the participles having testified and having spoken, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν

The term villages refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:26

δὲ

Luke is using the word translated But to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἀνάστηθι

Here the word arise means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: Idiom)

τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν

The angel speaks of the road going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: Idiom)

αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος

This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: Background Information)

Acts 8:27

ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη

As in the previous verse, the word arising means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: Idiom)

ἰδοὺ

Luke is using the word behold to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: INVALID translatewriting-background)

ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ

This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: Idiom)

εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης

While the word eunuch describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Κανδάκης

Kandake was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς

Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was over the treasure of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: Metaphor)

ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὃς ἐληλύθει

Your language may say “gone” rather than come in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 8:28

τοῦ ἅρματος

Here and in 8:29 and 8:38, the term chariot probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν

Luke is using the phrase the prophet Isaiah figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: Metonymy)

ἀνεγίνωσκεν

Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as 8:30 explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:29

πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ

The Spirit means figuratively that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: Metonymy)

κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “join yourself to this chariot” or “keep pace with this chariot” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:30

ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην

Luke is using the phrase Isaiah the prophet figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: Metonymy)

ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις

The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:31

πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?

The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ

The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 8:32

ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη

This a quotation from Isaiah 53:7–8. It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἤχθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος

A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: Translate Unknowns)

οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ

This means that the Messiah does not speak, by association with the way a person would open his mouth in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:33

ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of humiliation and justice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?

Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?

Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generation, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:34

ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν

Together the words answering and said mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: Hendiadys)

δέομαί σου

The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: Idiom)

ἑτέρου τινός

In this context, the pronoun other means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 8:35

ἀνοίξας…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ

This means that Philip spoke, by association with the way a person would be opening his mouth in order to speak. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: Metonymy)

τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης

By this scripture, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Luke is using the name Jesus figuratively by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 8:36

τι ὕδωρ…ὕδωρ

Luke and the official are using the word water figuratively to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: Metonymy)

τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?

This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in 8:37 by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

με βαπτισθῆναι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 8:37

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: Textual Variants)

ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου

Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: Metaphor)

σωθήσει

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν

Together the words answering and said mean that the eunuch responded to the what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: Hendiadys)

Acts 8:38

ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα

Luke is using the term chariot figuratively by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: Metonymy)

ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν

The pronoun he stands for Philip, and the pronoun him stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Acts 8:39

γὰρ

While the word translated for often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip any more because he did not look for him but instead went on his way. Rather, the word for seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

Acts 8:40

Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον

The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: Active or Passive)

διερχόμενος

Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”

τὰς πόλεις πάσας

Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: Hyperbole)

Ἄζωτον… Καισάρειαν

Azotus and Caesarea are the names of cities. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 9

Acts 9 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

“Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.

Acts 9:1

ὁ…Σαῦλος

The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation.

δὲ

Luke uses the word translated But to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς

Luke is using the two words threat and murder together to express a single idea. The word murder tells what kind of threat Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: Hendiadys)

ἐμπνέων

Luke is using the term breathing figuratively by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:2

αὐτοῦ…εὕρῃ…ἀγάγῃ

The pronoun him refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun he refer to Saul. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς

Luke is using the terms Damascus and synagogues figuratively by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: Metonymy)

Damascus

Damascus is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας

As the General Introduction to Acts explains, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: How to Translate Names)

δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 9:3

ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι

Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγένετο

Luke uses the phrase it happened that to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”

ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.

Acts 9:4

πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν

This could mean: (1) “Saul threw himself to the ground” or (2) “The light caused him to fall to the ground” or (3) “Saul fell to the ground the way one who fainted fell.” Saul did not fall accidentally.

τί με διώκεις?

This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as either a statement or as a command. Alternate translation: “You are persecuting me!” or “Stop persecuting me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 9:5

εἶ…σὺ

Both occurrences of the word you here are singular.

τίς εἶ, κύριε?

Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the Lord. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power.

ὁ

Jesus is speaking. Alternate translation: “he replied”

Acts 9:6

ἀνάστηθι καὶ εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν πόλιν

Alternate translation: “get up and go into Damascus”

λαληθήσεταί σοι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 9:7

ἀκούοντες μὲν τῆς φωνῆς, μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες

Alternate translation: “they heard the voice, but they did not see anyone”

μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες

Apparently only Saul experienced the light. Alternate translation: “but saw no one”

Acts 9:8

ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ

This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν

Saul was blind. Alternate translation: “he could not see anything”

Acts 9:9

ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων

Alternate translation: “he was blind for three days” or “he could not see anything for three days”

οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν

It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason.

Acts 9:10

Ἁνανίας

The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3. You may translate this name the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἦν δέ

This introduces Ananias as a new character. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ὁ…εἶπεν

Alternate translation: “Ananias said”

Acts 9:11

πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν

Alternate translation: “go to Straight Street”

οἰκίᾳ Ἰούδα

This Judas is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying.

Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα

Alternate translation: “a man from the city of Tarsus named Saul” or “Saul of Tarsus”

Acts 9:12

ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας

This was a symbol of giving a spiritual blessing to Saul. (See: Symbolic Action)

ἀναβλέψῃ

Alternate translation: “he might regain his ability to see”

Acts 9:13

ἁγίοις σου

Here, saints refers to Christians. Alternate translation: “the people in Jerusalem who believe in you”

Acts 9:14

ἔχει ἐξουσίαν…δῆσαι πάντας

It is implied that the extent of the power and authority granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου

Here, your name refers to Jesus. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:15

σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστίν μοι οὗτος

Here, chosen instrument refers to something that is set apart for service. Alternate translation: “I have chosen him to serve me” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου

This is an expression for identifying or speaking out for Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order that he might speak about me” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:16

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου

This is an expression meaning “for telling people about me.” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:17

σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς

All occurrences of the word you here are singular and refer to Saul. (See: Forms of You)

Ananias goes to the house where Saul is staying. After Saul is healed, the story shifts from Ananias back to Saul.

ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν

It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. Alternate translation: “So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it”

ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας

Ananias laid his hands on Saul. This was a symbol of giving a blessing to Saul. (See: Symbolic Action)

ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “has sent me so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 9:18

ἀπέπεσαν…ὡς λεπίδες

Alternate translation: “something that appeared like fish scales fell”

ἀναστὰς ἐβαπτίσθη

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he got up and Ananias baptized him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 9:20

ἐκήρυσσεν…οὗτός

Here, he refers to Saul, and this one refers to Jesus, the Son of God.

Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Acts 9:21

πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες

The word allis a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: Hyperbole)

οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο

This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο

Here, name refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:22

συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους

They were distressed in the sense that they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Christ.

Acts 9:23

αὐτόν

The word him refers to Saul.

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

This refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 9:24

ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But someone told their plan to Saul” or “But Saul learned about their plan” (See: Active or Passive)

παρετηροῦντο…καὶ τὰς πύλας

This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates.

Acts 9:25

οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

The disciples were people who believed Saul’s message about Jesus and were following his teaching.

διὰ τοῦ τείχους, καθῆκαν αὐτὸν, χαλάσαντες ἐν σπυρίδι

Alternate translation: “used ropes to lower him in a large basket through an opening in the wall”

Acts 9:26

παραγενόμενος…ἐπείραζεν…αὐτόν…ἐστὶν

Here all occurrences of the words he and him refer to Saul.

καὶ πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν

Here, they were all is a generalization, but it is possible that it refers to every person. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of him” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 9:27

διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “Barnabas told the apostles”

εἶδεν

Alternate translation: “Saul had seen”

ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “the Lord had spoken to Saul”

ἐπαρρησιάσατο ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of Jesus Christ without fear. Alternate translation: “had openly preached the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:28

ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν

Here the word he refers to Paul. The word them probably refers to the apostles and other disciples in Jerusalem.

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου

This could mean: (1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” or (2) name is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the Lord Jesus” or “with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 9:29

συνεζήτει πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς

Saul tried to reason with the Jews who spoke Greek.

Acts 9:30

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ

The words the brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem.

κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν

The phrase brought him down is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.

ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Ταρσόν

Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 9:31

This verse is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth.

εἶχεν εἰρήνην

This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished. Alternate translation: “lived peacefully”

ἡ…ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας

This is the first use of the singular church to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel.

οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη

The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God helped them grow and to go on” or “the Holy Spirit built them up and they continued on” (See: Active or Passive)

πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου

Traveling is here a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “living in obedience to the Lord” or “continuing to honor the Lord” (See: Metaphor)

τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος

Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them”

Acts 9:32

Πέτρον

In this verse, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.

ἐγένετο δὲ

This phrase is used to mark a new part of the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

διὰ πάντων

This is an generalization for Peter’s visiting the believers in many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. (See: Hyperbole)

κατελθεῖν

The phrase come down is used here because Lydda is lower in elevation than the other places where he was traveling.

Λύδδα

Lydda is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel.

Acts 9:33

εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα

Peter was not intentionally searching for a paralyzed person, but happened upon him. Alternate translation: “There Peter met a man”

ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν

This introduces Aeneas as a new character in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος

This is background information about Aeneas. (See: Background Information)

παραλελυμένος

Aeneas was unable to walk, and probably unable to move below the waist.

Acts 9:34

στρῶσον σεαυτῷ

Alternate translation: “roll up your mat”

Acts 9:35

πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα

This is a generalization referring to many of the people there. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” or “many people who lived in Lydda and Sharon” (See: Hyperbole)

Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα

The city of Lydda was located in the Plain of Sharon.

εἶδαν αὐτὸν

It may be helpful to state that they saw that the man was healed. Alternate translation: “saw the man whom Peter had healed”

οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον

Here, turned to the Lord is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying the Lord” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 9:36

δέ…ἦν

This introduces a new part in the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Verses 36-37 give background information about the woman named Tabitha. (See: Background Information)

Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς

Tabitha is her name in the Aramaic language, and Dorcas is her name in the Greek language. Both names mean “gazelle.” Alternate translation: “Tabitha, which was Dorcas in the Greek language” (See: How to Translate Names)

πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν

Alternate translation: “doing many good things”

Acts 9:37

ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις

This refers to the time when Peter was in Joppa. You can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And it came about while Peter was nearby” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λούσαντες…αὐτὴν

This was washing to prepare for her burial.

ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ

This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process.

Acts 9:39

εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον

Alternate translation: “to the upstairs room where Dorcas’ body was lying”

πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι

It is possible that all the widows of the town were there since it was not a large town.

χῆραι

These widows would have need help since their husbands had died.

μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα

Alternate translation: “while she was still alive with the disciples”

Acts 9:40

ἐκβαλὼν…ἔξω πάντας

Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha. Alternate translation: “told them all to leave the room”

Acts 9:41

δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν

Peter extended his hand to her to help her stand up.

τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας

The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them.

Acts 9:42

γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης

This refers to the miracle of Peter’s raising Tabitha from the dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπίστευσαν…ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον

Alternate translation: “believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus”

Acts 9:43

ἐγένετο δὲ

This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ

Alternate translation: “a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins”

Acts 10

Acts 10 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Unclean

The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God’s people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: clean, wash and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Baptism and the Holy Spirit

The Holy Spirit “fell on” those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.

Acts 10:1

This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.

Κορνήλιος

Verses 1-2 give background information about Cornelius. (See: Background Information)

ἀνὴρ δέ τις

This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς

Alternate translation: “whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army”

Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς

Alternate translation: “the Italian Regiment”

Acts 10:2

εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν

Alternate translation: “believing in God and seeking to honor and worship God in his life”

φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν

The word fearing here has the sense of deep respect and awe.

τῷ λαῷ

Here, the people refers to Jewish people who were in need.

δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός

The phrase through all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “he prayed to God a lot” or “he prayed to God regularly” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 10:3

ὥραν ἐνάτην

This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”

εἶδεν…φανερῶς

Alternate translation: “Cornelius clearly saw”

Acts 10:4

ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ

Cornelius looked intently at the angel.

εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “Then the angel said to Cornelius”

αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ

It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts that have gone up to him as a memorial offering to him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 10:6

βυρσεῖ

A tanner is a person who makes leather from animal skins.

Acts 10:7

ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”

στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ

This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God. Alternate translation: “one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God”

εὐσεβῆ

The adjective devout describes a person who worshiped God and served him.

Acts 10:8

ἐξηγησάμενος ἅπαντα αὐτοῖς

Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers.

ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν Ἰόππην

Alternate translation: “he sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa”

Acts 10:9

ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων

Here the word they refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command (Acts 10:7).

The story shifts away from Cornelius to tell us what God is doing with to Peter.

περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην

Alternate translation: “at around noon”

ἀνέβη…ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα

The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them.

Acts 10:10

παρασκευαζόντων…αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “before the people finished cooking the food”

ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις

Alternate translation: “God gave him a vision” or “he saw a vision” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 10:11

θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον

This was the beginning of Peter’s vision. It can be a new sentence.

ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην, τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς

The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth.

τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς καθιέμενον

Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners”

Acts 10:12

πάντα τὰ τετράποδα, καὶ ἑρπετὰ τῆς γῆς, καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

From Peter’s response in the next verse, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. Alternate translation: “every kind of animal and reptile and bird that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 10:13

ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν

The person speaking is not specified. The voice was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 10:14

μηδαμῶς

Alternate translation: “I will not do that”

οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον

It is implied that some the animals in the container were unclean as defined by the law of Moses and were not to be eaten by believers who lived before Christ died. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 10:15

ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν

If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Acts 10:16

τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς

It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times.”

Acts 10:17

ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος

This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant.

ἰδοὺ

The word behold here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate.

ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα

It is implied that this house had a wall with a gate in it to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διερωτήσαντες τὴν οἰκίαν

This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UST does.

Acts 10:18

φωνήσαντες

Cornelius’ men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter.

Acts 10:19

τοῦ…Πέτρου διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος

Alternate translation: “as Peter was still wondering about the meaning of the vision”

τὸ Πνεῦμα

Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”

ἰδοὺ

Alternate translation: “Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: three”

ἄνδρες τρεῖς ζητοῦσιν σε

Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts have a different number of men. (See: Textual Variants)

Acts 10:20

κατάβηθι

Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house”

πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς, μηδὲν διακρινόμενος

It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with them, because they were strangers and they were Gentiles.

Acts 10:21

ἐγώ εἰμι ὃν ζητεῖτε

Alternate translation: “I am the man you are looking for”

Acts 10:22

οἱ…εἶπαν

Here, they refers to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius (Acts 10:7).

Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form as the UST does. (See: Active or Passive)

φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν

The word fearing here has the sense of deep respect and awe.

ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων

This number of people is exaggerated with the word whole to emphasize how widely this was known among the Jews. (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 10:23

εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν

The journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon.

ἐξένισεν

Alternate translation: “he invited them to be his guests”

τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππης

This phrase refers to believers who lived in Joppa.

Acts 10:24

τῇ…ἐπαύριον

This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day.

ὁ δὲ Κορνήλιος ἦν προσδοκῶν αὐτοὺς

Alternate translation: “And Cornelius expected them”

Acts 10:25

ὡς…τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον

Alternate translation: “when Peter entered the house”

πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας

He did this to honor Peter. Alternate translation: “and kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 10:26

ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι

This was a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius not to worship Peter. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are”

Acts 10:27

αὐτῷ

The word him here refers to Cornelius.

συνεληλυθότας πολλούς

It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “many Gentile people gathered together” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 10:28

ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε

Here, You yourselves is plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: Forms of You)

ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ

This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man”

ἀλλοφύλῳ

Here, foreigner refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived.

Acts 10:30

καὶ ὁ Κορνήλιος ἔφη

Cornelius responds to Peter’s question.

ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας

Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is four days ago. Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, “three days ago.”

προσευχόμενος

Some ancient authorities say “fasting and praying” instead of simply praying. (See: Textual Variants)

τὴν ἐνάτην

This was the normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God.

Acts 10:31

In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour.

σου…σου

Both occurrences of your are singular and refer to Cornelius. (See: Forms of You)

εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ

This does not imply that God had forgotten. Alternate translation: “brought you to God’s attention”

Acts 10:32

μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος

Alternate translation: “tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you”

Acts 10:33

ἐξαυτῆς

Alternate translation: “right away”

σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος

This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and I certainly thank you for coming”

ἡμεῖς

The word we here does not include Peter. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ

This refers to the presence of God.

τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Lord has told you to say” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 10:34

Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius.

ἀνοίξας δὲ Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν

Alternate translation: “And Peter began to speak to them”

ἐπ’ ἀληθείας

This phrase means that what Peter is about to say is especially important.

οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός

Alternate translation: “God does not favor certain people”

Acts 10:35

ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην, δεκτὸς αὐτῷ ἐστιν

Alternate translation: “he accepts anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds”

φοβούμενος

The word fears here has the sense of deep respect and awe.

Acts 10:36

The long sentence in verse 36-38 can be shortened into several sentences as in the UST.

οὗτός ἐστιν πάντων Κύριος

Here, all means “all people.”

Acts 10:37

καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας

The word all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “throughout Judea” or “in many places in Judea” (See: Hyperbole)

μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης

Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people to repent and then baptized them”

Acts 10:38

ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει

The Holy Spirit and God’s power are spoken of as if they are something that can be poured out onto a person. (See: Metaphor)

πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου

The word all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: Hyperbole)

ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ

The idiom was with him means “was helping him.” (See: Idiom)

Acts 10:39

ἡμεῖς…ἐποίησεν…ὃν…κρεμάσαντες

Here, we refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth. The words he and him here refer to Jesus. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἔν…τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

This refers mainly to Judea at that time.

κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου

This is another expression that refers to crucifixion. Alternate translation: “by nailing him to a wooden cross”

Acts 10:40

τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν

Here, raised up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “but God caused him to live again” (See: Idiom)

τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ

Alternate translation: “on the third day after he died”

ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι

Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him after he was raised from the dead”

Acts 10:41

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.

Acts 10:42

ἡμῖν

Here the word us includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Peter finishes his speech to everyone in the house of Cornelius, which he began in Acts 10:34.

ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God chose this Jesus” (See: Active or Passive)

ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν

This refers to people who are still living and people who have died. Alternate translation: “of the people who are alive and the people who are dead” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 10:43

τούτῳ πάντες οἱ προφῆται μαρτυροῦσιν

Alternate translation: “All the prophets bear witness to Jesus that”

ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, πάντα τὸν πιστεύοντα εἰς αὐτὸν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ

Here, his name refers to the actions of Jesus. His name means God who saves. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 10:44

ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον

Here the word fell means “happened suddenly.” Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit suddenly came”

πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας

Here, all refers to all the Gentiles at the house who were listening to Peter.

Acts 10:45

ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος

This refers to the Holy Spirit himself who was given to them.

ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God poured out the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκκέχυται

The Holy Spirit is spoken of as if he were something that could be poured out upon people. It implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη

Here, also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers.

Acts 10:46

λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγαλυνόντων τὸν Θεόν

These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God.

Acts 10:47

μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?

Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has the right to withhold water so that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received the Holy Spirit just as we did!” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 10:48

προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι

It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. You can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι

Here, in the name of Jesus Christ expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11

Acts 11 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.

Acts 11:1

δὲ

Now signals the beginning of a new event in the story.

δὲ

This marks a new part of the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ

The phrase the brothers here refers to the believers in Judea.

οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν

Alternate translation: “who were throughout the province of Judea”

ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “had believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:2

Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.

ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it.

οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς

This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:3

ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας

The phrase uncircumcised men refers to Gentiles. (See: Metonymy)

συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς

It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.

Acts 11:4

Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius’ house.

ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο

Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner.

καθεξῆς

Alternate translation: “exactly what happened”

Acts 11:5

ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην

The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.

τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς

See how you translated this in Acts 10:11. Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners”

Acts 11:6

τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 10:12. Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

θηρία

Here, wild beasts probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control.

ἑρπετὰ

These are reptiles.

Acts 11:7

ἤκουσα…καὶ φωνῆς

The person speaking is not specified. The voice was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated a voice in Acts 10:13. (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 11:8

μηδαμῶς

See how you translated this in Acts 10:14. Alternate translation: “I will not do that”

κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου

Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative profane or unclean … never entered, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: Double Negatives)

ἀκάθαρτον

In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually unclean in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.

Acts 11:9

ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου

This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:10

τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς

It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated This happened three times in Acts 10:16.

Acts 11:11

Here, we refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἰδοὺ

The word behold alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.

ἐξαυτῆς

Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”

ἀπεσταλμένοι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 11:12

μηδὲν διακρίναντα

Alternate translation: “not being concerned that they were Gentiles”

ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ

Alternate translation: “went with me to Caesarea”

οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι

Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers”

εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός

This refers to the house of Cornelius.

Acts 11:13

Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον

See how you translated the same phrase in Acts 10:32. Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”

Acts 11:14

πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου

This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:15

Here the word us refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς

This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.

ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ

Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he also came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐν ἀρχῇ

Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.

Acts 11:16

ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 11:17

αὐτοῖς…ἡμῖν

The word them refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word us includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν?

Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν

Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.

Acts 11:18

ἀκούσαντες…ἡσύχασαν

The word they refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke.

ἡσύχασαν

Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter”

καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν

Here, life refers to eternal life. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and life, you could express the same ideas with the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 11:19

οὖν

This introduces the new part of the story. He tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.(See: Introduction of a New Event)

οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον

The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.

οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jews had been persecuting after they killed Stephen, who had left Jerusalem” (See: Active or Passive)

διῆλθον

Alternate translation: “went in many different directions”

μόνον Ἰουδαίοις

The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.

Acts 11:20

ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς

These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “and also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 11:21

ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν

God’s hand signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον

Here, turned to the Lord is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 11:22

τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας

Here, ears refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:23

ὃς…ἰδὼν…ἐχάρη…παρεκάλει

All occurrences of the word he refer to Barnabas. The word them refers to the new believers (Acts 11:20).

ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Alternate translation: “saw how God acted kindly toward the believers”

παρεκάλει πάντας

Alternate translation: “kept on encouraging them”

προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ

Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to the Lord” or “to continue to trust in the Lord”

τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας

Here the heart refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:24

πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου

The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.

προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ

Here, added means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 11:25

ἐξῆλθεν

Here the word he refers to Barnabas.

ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς Ταρσὸν

Alternate translation: “he went out to the city of Tarsus”

Acts 11:26

καὶ εὑρὼν

It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.

ἐγένετο

This begins a new event in the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ

Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were gathered together with the church”

χρηματίσαι τε πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς

This implies that other people called the believers by this name. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch were the first to call the disciples Christians” (See: Active or Passive)

πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ

Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”

Acts 11:27

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.

Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: Background Information)

κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν

Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it.

Acts 11:28

ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος

Alternate translation: “whose name was Agabus”

ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος

Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that”

λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι

Alternate translation: “a great shortage of food would happen”

ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην

Here, whole was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου

Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κλαυδίου

Claudius is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 11:29

δὲ

The word So marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine.

καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις

The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.

τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς

Alternate translation: “to the believers in Judea”

Acts 11:30

καὶ ἐποίησαν

Here, they refers to the believers in the church in Antioch (Acts 11:27).

διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου

Here, hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: Idiom)

Acts 12

Acts 12 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Personification

The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: word of God, word of Yahweh, word of the Lord, word of truth, scripture and Personification)

Acts 12:1

This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release.

δὲ

This begins a new part of the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν

Here, that time refers to the time of the famine.

ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας

This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: Idiom)

τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας

Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κακῶσαί

Alternate translation: “in order to cause the believers to suffer”

Acts 12:2

ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ

This is background information about Herod’s killing James. (See: Background Information)

ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον

This could mean: (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 12:3

ἰδὼν…προσέθετο

Here the word he refers to Herod (Acts 12:1).

ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Alternate translation: “And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders”

ὅτι…ἐστιν

Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened”

ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Alternate translation: “made the Jewish leaders happy”

ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων

This phrase refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast”

Acts 12:4

τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν

Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers”

βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ

Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people”

Acts 12:5

ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ

This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in the prison. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: Active or Passive)

προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 12:6

ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ

That Herod planned to execute him can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν

Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. Alternate translation: “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains”

ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν

Alternate translation: “were guarding the prison doors”

Acts 12:7

ἐπέστη…αὐτὸν…αὐτοῦ

The words him and his refer to Peter.

ἰδοὺ

The word behold alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.

ἐπέστη

Alternate translation: “appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him”

ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι

Alternate translation: “in the prison room”

πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου

Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. Alternate translation: “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter”

ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν

The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them.

Acts 12:8

ἐποίησεν…οὕτως

Alternate translation: “Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed”

λέγει αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “the angel said to Peter”

Acts 12:9

ἠκολούθει…ᾔδει…ἐδόκει

Here the word he refers to Peter.

ἠκολούθει

Alternate translation: “Peter followed the angel”

οὐκ ᾔδει

Alternate translation: “he did not understand”

ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 12:10

διελθόντες…ἦλθαν…αὐτοῖς…προῆλθον

The words they and them refer to Peter and the angel.

διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν

It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διελθόντες

Alternate translation: “when they had walked by”

καὶ δευτέραν

The word guard is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: Ellipsis)

ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν

Alternate translation: “Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate”

τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν

Alternate translation: “that opened to the city” or “that went from the prison to the city”

ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς

Here, by itself means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: “the gate swung open for them” or “the gate opened itself for them” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν

Alternate translation: “they walked along a street”

εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “the angel left Peter suddenly” or “suddenly the angel disappeared”

Acts 12:11

καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος

This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “And when Peter became fully awake and alert” or “And when Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: Idiom)

ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου

Here, the hand of Herod refers to “Herod’s power” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: Metonymy)

ἐξείλατό με

Alternate translation: “rescued me”

πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jewish people probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 12:12

συνιδών

He became aware that God had rescued him.

Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου

John was also called Mark. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 12:13

κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ

Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. Alternate translation: “when Peter knocked”

τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος

Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”

προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι

Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking”

Acts 12:14

ἐπιγνοῦσα…οὐκ ἤνοιξεν…ἀπήγγειλεν

Here the words she and her all refer to the servant girl Rhoda.

ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς

Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited”

οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα

Alternate translation: “she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door”

ἀπήγγειλεν

Alternate translation: “she told them” or “she said”

ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος

Peter was still standing outside. Alternate translation: “is standing outside the door”

Acts 12:15

οἱ…οἱ

Here the word they refers to the people who were inside praying (Acts 12:12).

μαίνῃ

The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy”

ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν

Alternate translation: “she insisted that what she said was true”

οἱ…ἔλεγον

Alternate translation: “they answered”

ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ

Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel”

Acts 12:16

εἶδαν

Here the word they refers to the people in the house.

ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων

The word continued means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.

Acts 12:17

ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα

Alternate translation: “Tell these things”

τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Alternate translation: “the other believers”

Acts 12:18

δὲ

The word Now is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.

γενομένης…ἡμέρας

Alternate translation: “in the morning”

ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο

This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: Litotes)

ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words disturbance, you could express the same ideas with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 12:19

αὐτὸν…εὑρὼν…διέτριβεν

The word him here refers to Peter. The word he refers to Herod.

Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν

This could mean: (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.”

ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι

It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped.

καὶ κατελθὼν

The phrase having gone down is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.

Acts 12:20

Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life.

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν

Here the word they is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: Hyperbole)

πείσαντες Βλάστον

Alternate translation: “these men persuaded Blastus”

Βλάστον

Blastus was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: How to Translate Names)

ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην

Alternate translation: “these men requested peace”

τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς

They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν

It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 12:21

τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ

This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them”

ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν

This royal clothing was expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king.

καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος

The throne was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.

Acts 12:23

παραχρῆμα…ἄγγελος

Alternate translation: “right away an angel” or “while the people were still praising Herod, an angel”

ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill”

οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ

Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.

γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν

Here, worm refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 12:24

ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο

The word of God is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ

Alternate translation: “the message God sent about Jesus”

Acts 12:25

This verse continues the history from 11:30. (See: End of Story)

Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ

Although some ancient copies read “Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem,” the reading of “to Jerusalem” is probably correct. We know they went back to Antioch from Jerusalem, Therefore, this verse may indicate that they went somewhere else in Judea, and then returned to Jerusalem before they went back to Antioch.

πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν

This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in Acts 11:29-30. Alternate translation: “when they had delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 13

Acts 13 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus.

Special concepts in this chapter

A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: Metaphor and righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Acts 13:1

Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word “they” probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words “they” and “their” probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: Background Information)

Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.

δὲ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν

Alternate translation: “At that time in the church at Antioch”

Συμεὼν…Νίγερ…Λούκιος…Μαναήν

These are men’s names. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος

Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up. Some scholars suggest he was Herod’s foster brother.

Acts 13:2

ἀφορίσατε

Alternate translation: “Appoint to serve”

προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς

The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.

Acts 13:3

ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς

This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. Alternate translation: “laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἀπέλυσαν

Alternate translation: “they sent those men off” or “they sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do”

Acts 13:4

Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas.

οὖν

This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.

αὐτοὶ…ἐκπεμφθέντες

Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were sent out”

κατῆλθον

The phrase went down is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.

Σελεύκιαν

a city by the sea

Acts 13:5

Σαλαμῖνι

The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.

κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, word of God is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: Synecdoche)

συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων

This could mean: (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”

εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην

Alternate translation: “And John Mark went with them and was helping them”

Acts 13:6

εὗρον

Here the word they refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.

ὅλην τὴν νῆσον

They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.

Πάφου

Paphos was a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived.

εὗρον

Here, found means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”

ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον

Alternate translation: “a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts”

ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς

Bar Jesus means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 13:7

ἦν σὺν

Alternate translation: “was often with” or “was often in the company of”

ἀνθυπάτῳ

A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”

ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ

This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: Background Information)

οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος

Alternate translation: “The proconsul summoned”

Acts 13:8

Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος

This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: How to Translate Names)

οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “for that was what he was called in Greek”

ἀνθίστατο…αὐτοῖς…ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον

Alternate translation: “resisted them by trying to turn the proconsul away” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn the proconsul away”

ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως

Here, to turn … away from is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 13:9

αὐτὸν

The word him refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus (Acts 13:6-8).

Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος

Saul was his Jewish name, and Paul was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “looked at him intensely”

Acts 13:10

ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας

Alternate translation: “O you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong”

υἱὲ διαβόλου

Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: Metonymy)

ῥᾳδιουργίας

In this context, wickedness means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law.

ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης

Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas.

οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας?

Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας

Here, straight paths refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: Idiom)

Acts 13:11

χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ

Here, hand represents the power of God and upon you implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: Metonymy)

ἔσῃ τυφλὸς

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον

Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun”

ἄχρι καιροῦ

Alternate translation: “for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God”

ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος

Alternate translation: “the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything”

περιάγων

Alternate translation: “Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and”

Acts 13:12

ἀνθύπατος

A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”

ἐπίστευσεν

Alternate translation: “believed in Jesus”

ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazing him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 13:13

δὲ

The word Now marks the beginning of a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.

οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον

Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. Here, those around Paul refers to Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: Background Information)

οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον

This refers to Paul and his companions.

ἀναχθέντες…ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου

Alternate translation: “having traveled by sailboat from Paphos”

ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας

Alternate translation: “arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia”

Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “But John Mark, leaving Paul and Barnabas”

Acts 13:14

Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν

Alternate translation: “the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia”

Acts 13:15

μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

The phrase the law and the prophets refers to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες

Alternate translation: “told someone to say to them” or “asked someone to tell them”

ἀδελφοί

The term brothers is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.

εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν

Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people”

λέγετε

Alternate translation: “please speak it” or “please tell it to us”

Acts 13:16

Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.

κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ

This phrase could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: Symbolic Action)

οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν

This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”

τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε

Alternate translation: “God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say”

Acts 13:17

ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ

Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”

ἡμῶν

Here the word our refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν

Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν

Alternate translation: “caused our people to become very numerous”

μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ

This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: Metonymy)

ἐξ αὐτῆς

Alternate translation: “out from the land of Egypt”

Acts 13:18

ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς

This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”

Acts 13:19

καθελὼν…κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν

Here the word he refers to God. The word them refers to the people of Israel. The words their land refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἔθνη

Here the word nations refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.

Acts 13:20

ἔδωκεν

Alternate translation: “God gave them”

ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου

Alternate translation: “until the time of the prophet Samuel”

Acts 13:21

ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα

Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years”

Acts 13:22

μεταστήσας αὐτὸν

This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king”

ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα

Alternate translation: “God chose David to be their king”

βασιλέα

Alternate translation: “the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites”

ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας

Alternate translation: “about whom God testified by saying”

εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου

The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament.

εὗρον

Alternate translation: “I have observed that”

ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου

This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: Idiom)

Acts 13:23

τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος

This phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants (Acts 13:22). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants”

ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ

Here, Israel refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: Metonymy)

κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν

Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do”

Acts 13:24

πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus”

βάπτισμα μετανοίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 13:25

τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι

The quotation here is from the Gospels.

τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?

John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ

John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ

This phrase emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.

ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ

This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι

The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes”

Acts 13:26

ἡμῖν

Here the word us includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν

Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.

ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 13:27

τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες

Alternate translation: “did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them”

τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν

Here the word voices represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: Metonymy)

τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν

Alternate translation: “they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do”

Acts 13:28

Here the word they refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him here refers to Jesus.

μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες

Alternate translation: “they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus”

ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον

The word asked here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for.

Acts 13:29

ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα

Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him”

καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου

It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ ξύλου

This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “the cross” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 13:30

ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν

But indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.

ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν

To be with the dead means that Jesus was dead. Alternate translation: “raised him from among those who were dead”

ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν

Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: Idiom)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

This phrase means “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.

Acts 13:31

ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡμέρας πλείους

We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.

νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν

Alternate translation: “are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus”

Acts 13:32

τοὺς πατέρας

Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. Alternate translation: “our ancestors”

Acts 13:33

ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν

You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: Verse Bridges)

τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν

Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”

ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν

Here, raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: Idiom)

ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ

Alternate translation: “This is what was also written in the second Psalm”

τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ

Alternate translation: “Psalm 2”

Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Acts 13:34

δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά

This quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah.

ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν

Alternate translation: “God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again”

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.

τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά

Alternate translation: “the holy and certain blessings”

Acts 13:35

διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει

Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ…λέγει

David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. Alternate translation: “David also says”

οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν

The phrase see decay is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: Metonymy)

οὐ δώσεις

David is speaking to God here.

Acts 13:36

ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ

Alternate translation: “during his lifetime”

ὑπηρετήσας τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ βουλῇ

Alternate translation: “having done what God wanted him to do” or “after he had done what pleased God”

ἐκοιμήθη

This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: Euphemism)

προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “was buried with his ancestors who had died”

εἶδεν διαφθοράν

The phrase saw decay is a metonym for “his body decayed.” Alternate translation: “his body rotted” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 13:37

ὃν δὲ

Alternate translation: “But Jesus whom”

ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν

Here, raised up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: Idiom)

οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν

The phrase did not see decay is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 13:38

γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν

Alternate translation: “know this” or “this is important for you to know”

ἀδελφοί

Paul uses the term brothers because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”

ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: Active or Passive)

ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 13:39

ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: Active or Passive)

τούτῳ

Here the term this one refers to Jesus.

ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων

Alternate translation: “By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him”

Acts 13:40

βλέπετε

It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις

Alternate translation: “what the prophets spoke about”

Acts 13:41

ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί

Alternate translation: “Look, you who feel contempt” or “Look, you who ridicule”

θαυμάσατε

Alternate translation: “be amazed” or “be shocked”

καὶ ἀφανίσθητε

Alternate translation: “and die”

ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν

In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word I refers to God.

ἔργον ἐργάζομαι

Alternate translation: “am doing something”

ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “during your lifetime”

ἔργον ὃ

Alternate translation: “I am doing something which”

ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν

Alternate translation: “even if someone would tell you about it”

Acts 13:42

ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “When Paul and Barnabas were leaving”

παρεκάλουν

Alternate translation: “the people begged them”

τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα

Here, words refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 13:43

λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς

This could mean: (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.

προσηλύτων

These proselytes were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism.

οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς

Alternate translation: “and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them”

προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ

It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 13:44

σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις συνήχθη

The city represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city were gathered together” (See: Metonymy)

ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 13:45

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, Jews represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου

Here, jealousy is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: Metaphor)

ἀντέλεγον

Alternate translation: “contradicted” or “opposed”

τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 13:46

ὑμῖν…ἀπωθεῖσθε…στρεφόμεθα

The first two instances of the word you are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the word we refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἦν ἀναγκαῖον

This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, word of God is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: Synecdoche)

ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν

Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς

Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life”

στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη

Paul and Barnabas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 13:47

ἡμῖν

Here the word us refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς

Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word I refers to God and the word you is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: Forms of You)

εἰς φῶς

Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were a light that allowed people to see. (See: Metaphor)

εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with the verb “to save.” The phrase end refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 13:48

ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, word refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 13:49

διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας

Here, word refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 13:50

αὐτοὺς

Here the word them refers to Paul and Barnabas.

οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι

This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

παρώτρυναν

Alternate translation: “convinced” or “urged on”

τοὺς πρώτους

Alternate translation: “the most important men”

ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν

Alternate translation: “They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas”

ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “they removed Paul and Barnabas from their city”

Acts 13:51

ἦλθον εἰς Ἰκόνιον

This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium.

οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι

Alternate translation: “But after Paul and Silas shook off”

οἱ…ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς

This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: Symbolic Language)

Acts 13:52

οἵ…μαθηταὶ

Here, the disciples probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.

Acts 14

Acts 14 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“The message of his grace”

The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: grace, gracious and believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Zeus and Hermes

The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: god, false god, goddess, idol, idolater, idolatrous, idolatry)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.

Acts 14:1

The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.

ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ

This begins a new event.

λαλῆσαι οὕτως

It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 14:2

οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι

This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.

ἐπήγειραν…τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν

Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: Metaphor)

τὰς ψυχὰς

Here the word souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: Synecdoche)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Here, brothers refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.

Acts 14:3

Here the word “He” refers to the Lord.

μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν

Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in Acts 14:1. So could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless they stayed there”

τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “who demonstrated that the message about his grace was true”

τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “about the message of the Lord’s grace”

διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν

Here, hands refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 14:4

ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως

Here, population of the city refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: Metonymy)

ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace. Alternate translation: “supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews”

σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις

The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: Ellipsis)

τοῖς ἀποστόλοις

Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here, apostles might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.”

Acts 14:5

Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.

ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς

Alternate translation: “to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them”

Acts 14:6

τῆς Λυκαονίας

A district in Asia Minor (See: How to Translate Names)

Λύστραν

A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: How to Translate Names)

Δέρβην

Derbe is a city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 14:7

κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν

Alternate translation: “and where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news”

Acts 14:8

τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο

This phrase introduces a new person in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν

Alternate translation: “unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet”

χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “having been born as a cripple”

Acts 14:9

ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man”

ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 14:10

ἥλατο

This implies that the man’s legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air”

Acts 14:11

ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος

This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man.

ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν

Here, raised their voice means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-idiom/01.md)

οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς

A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Λυκαονιστὶ

The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language”

ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις

These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men.

Acts 14:12

Δία

Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἑρμῆν

Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 14:13

ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας

It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ταύρους καὶ στέμματα

The oxen were to be sacrificed. The wreaths were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.

ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας

The gates of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.

ἤθελεν θύειν

Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”

Acts 14:14

οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος

Luke is here probably using apostles in the general sense of “ones sent out.”

διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν

This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.

Acts 14:15

ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε?

Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ταῦτα ποιεῖτε

Alternate translation: “are you worshiping us”

καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι

By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!”

ὁμοιοπαθεῖς…ὑμῖν

Alternate translation: “like you in every way”

ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα

Here, turn from … to is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: “stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God” (See: Metaphor)

Θεὸν ζῶντα

Alternate translation: “a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives”

Acts 14:16

ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς

Alternate translation: “In previous times” or “Until now”

πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν

Going in a way, or going along a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 14:17

οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not … without, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: Litotes)

ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν

Here, your hearts refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 14:18

μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς

Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so.

μόλις κατέπαυσαν

Alternate translation: “had difficulty preventing”

Acts 14:19

πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους

It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowds to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς ὄχλους

These crowds may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.

νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι

Alternate translation: “because they thought that he was already dead”

Acts 14:20

τῶν μαθητῶν

These disciples were new believers in the city of Lystra.

εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν

Alternate translation: “Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”

ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην

Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”

Acts 14:21

τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην

Alternate translation: “in Derbe” (Acts 14:20)

Acts 14:22

ἡμᾶς

Here the word us includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν

Here, souls refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: Synecdoche)

παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει

Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”

καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν

Paul includes his hearers, so the word us is inclusive. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 14:23

χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν

The first two occurrences of they here refer to Paul and Barnabas. The third occurrence of they refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord.

χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους

Alternate translation: “And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”

παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς

This could mean: (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”

εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν

Who they refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers).

Acts 14:25

καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον

Here, word is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: Metonymy)

κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν

The phrase went down is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.

Acts 14:26

ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had commended Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas”

Acts 14:27

παραγενόμενοι…ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν

Here the words they and them refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word he refers to God.

συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν

Alternate translation: “called the local believers to meet together”

ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως

God’s enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 14:28

χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον

This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: Litotes)

Acts 15

Acts 15 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.

The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.

Special concepts in this chapter

Brothers

In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.

Obeying the law of Moses

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.

“Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality”

It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.

Acts 15:1

Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.

τινες

You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “some men who believed in Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας

The phrase coming down is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.

ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Here, brothers stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 15:2

στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης

This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: Litotes)

στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words dispute and debate, you could express the same ideas with verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ

Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem.

τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου

Alternate translation: “this issue”

Acts 15:3

οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: Active or Passive)

προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας

Here, church refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: Metonymy)

διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι

The words passed through and announcing indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.

ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν

Here, conversion means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word conversion, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if joy were an object that they brought to the brothers. Alternate translation: “what they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: Metaphor)

πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Here, brothers refers to fellow believers.

Acts 15:4

παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: Active or Passive)

μετ’ αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “through them”

Acts 15:5

αὐτοὺς, παραγγέλλειν

Here both occurrences of the word them refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.

δέ τινες

Here Luke uses the word But to contrast those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.

τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως

Alternate translation: “to obey the law of Moses”

Acts 15:6

ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου

The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.

Acts 15:7

αὐτούς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν

The word them refers to apostles and elders (Acts 15:6). Both occurrences of you are plural and refer to the apostles and elders present. (See: Forms of You)

Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law (Acts 15:5-6).

ἀδελφοί

Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.

διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου

Here, my mouth refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη

Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles would hear”

τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:8

καρδιογνώστης

Here, heart refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: Metonymy)

ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “witnesses to the Gentiles”

δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον

Alternate translation: “causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them”

καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν

Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: Ellipsis)

ἡμῖν

Here, us is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 15:9

οὐδὲν διέκρινεν

God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.

τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν

God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν

Here, heart stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:10

ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς

Peter includes his audience by his use of our and we. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

νῦν

Here, Now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.

τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι?

Peter uses this question to convict the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a yoke on the neck of the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν

Peter uses a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν

Here, our fathers refers to their Jewish ancestors.

Acts 15:11

ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 15:12

αὐτῶν

Here the word them refers to Paul and Barnabas.

πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος

See how you translated this phrase in (Acts 15:6) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group”

ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς

Alternate translation: “God had done” or “God had caused”

Acts 15:13

αὐτοὺς

Here the word they refers to Paul and Barnabas (Acts 15:12).

James begins to speak to the apostles and elders (Acts 15:6).

ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ

James was probably speaking only to men. Alternate translation: “fellow believers, listen”

Acts 15:14

ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν

Alternate translation: “graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them”

λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν

Alternate translation: “so that he might choose from among them a people”

τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ

Here, name refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:15

In verses 16-18, James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.

τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν

Here, words stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: Metonymy)

τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν

Alternate translation: “this confirms”

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as they wrote” or “just as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 15:16

ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω

Here I refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet.

ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν

This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: Metaphor)

τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ

Here, tent stands for David’s family. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:17

ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον

This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: Metaphor)

κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Here, men includes males and females. Alternate translation: “remnant of people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον

God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ ὄνομά μου

Here, my name stands for God. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:18

γνωστὰ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 15:19

μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν

You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν

A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 15:20

ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος

Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.

ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων

This phrase possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος

God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 15:21

Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος.

James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Μωϋσῆς

Here, Moses represents the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: Metonymy)

Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: Active or Passive)

κατὰ πόλιν

The word every here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 15:22

ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ

Here, church refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: Metonymy)

Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν

Judas is the name of a man. Barsabbas is a second name that people called him. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 15:23

οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν

This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”

ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς

Here both instances of the word brothers refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.

Κιλικίαν

Cilicia is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 15:24

ὑμᾶς…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα

Here us and we refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’ and Acts 15:22)

ὅτι τινὲς

Alternate translation: “that some men”

οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα

Alternate translation: “even though we gave no orders for them to go”

ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν

Here, souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “to teach things that have troubled you” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 15:25

ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας

The men they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas (Acts 15:22).

Acts 15:26

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here, name refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:27

Here the word we refers to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem (Acts 15:22). (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά

This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “they themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 15:28

μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες

This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 15:29

εἰδωλοθύτων

This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.

αἵματος

This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πνικτῶν

A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained.

ἔρρωσθε

The word Farewell announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye”

Acts 15:30

Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.

οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν

The word they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch”

οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: Active or Passive)

κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν

The phrase came down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.

Acts 15:31

ἐχάρησαν

Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced”

ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word encouragement, you could express the same idea with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 15:32

καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες

Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were also prophets” or “who were also prophets”

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”

ἐπεστήριξαν

Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 15:33

Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.

ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον

This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word they refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: Active or Passive)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Here, the brothers refers to the believers in Antioch.

πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς

See how you translated this in (Acts 15:22) Alternate translation: “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas”

Acts 15:35

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 15:36

Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys.

ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ

Alternate translation: “On our way back to Antioch” or “As we are going back”

ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Alternate translation: “let us care for the brothers” or “we should offer to help the believers”

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, word stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

πῶς ἔχουσιν

They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. Alternate translation: “to learn how they are doing”

Acts 15:38

Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον

The words wise not are used to say the opposite of wise. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: Litotes)

Παμφυλίας

Pamphylia was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.

μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον

Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them”

Acts 15:39

ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word disagreement, you could express the same idea with the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 15:40

παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν

To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 15:41

διήρχετο

The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν

Syria and Cilicia are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.

ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας

Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας

The word churches refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 16

Acts 16 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.

The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.

Acts 16:1

κατήντησεν…καὶ

This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: Go and Come)

μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος

Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: Background Information)

Δέρβην

Derbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.

ἰδοὺ

The word behold alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.

γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς

The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 16:2

ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν

Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”

Acts 16:3

περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν

It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.

διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις

Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”

ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν

Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 16:4

διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν

The word they here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).

αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν

Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”

τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:5

αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: Active or Passive)

αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει

This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 16:6

τὴν Φρυγίαν

Phrygia is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.

κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸν λόγον

Here, word stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 16:7

ἐλθόντες

Here, had come can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: Go and Come)

Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν

Mysia and Bithynia are two more regions in Asia. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ

Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit”

Acts 16:8

κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα

The phrase came down is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.

κατέβησαν

Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 16:9

ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη

Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”

παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him”

διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν

The phrase coming over is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.

Acts 16:10

ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς

Here the words we and us refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.

Acts 16:11

Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip.

Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν

Samothrace and Neapolis are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 16:12

κολωνία

This colony was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 16:14

τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία

Here, a certain woman introduces Lydia as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

πορφυρόπωλις

Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: Ellipsis)

Θυατείρων

Thyatira is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν

When Luke says Lydia was worshiping God, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.

ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν

For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: Metaphor)

διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν

Here, heart stands for a person’s mind. (See: Metonymy)

διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν

The author speaks about the heart or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:15

ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς

Here, her household refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 16:16

ἐγένετο δὲ

This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη

This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: Background Information)

παιδίσκην τινὰ

The phrase a certain introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

πνεῦμα Πύθωνα

An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.

Acts 16:17

ὁδὸν σωτηρίας

How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 16:18

διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here, name stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: Metonymy)

ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ

Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately”

Acts 16:19

οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς

Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl”

ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν

It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν

The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square”

ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας

Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”

Acts 16:20

προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς

Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges”

τοῖς στρατηγοῖς

These magistrates were rulers or judges.

οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν

Here the word our refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 16:21

παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν

Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do”

Acts 16:22

αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον

Here the words their and them refer to Paul and Silas.

ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:23

πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς

Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods”

παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς

Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape”

δεσμοφύλακι

A jailer was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison.

Acts 16:24

ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν

Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command”

τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον

Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks”

ξύλον

The stocks was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving.

Acts 16:26

σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: Active or Passive)

σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου

When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: Synecdoche)

ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: Active or Passive)

πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:27

ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: Active or Passive)

ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν

The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself”

Acts 16:28

ἐσμεν

Here the word we refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 16:29

αἰτήσας…φῶτα

The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

φῶτα

The word lights stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: Metonymy)

εἰσεπήδησεν

Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail”

προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ

The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 16:30

προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω

Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail”

τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:31

σωθήσῃ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ οἶκός σου

Here, your household refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 16:32

ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 16:33

ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 16:35

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.

ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους

Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave”

Acts 16:36

ἐξελθόντες

Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail”

Acts 16:37

ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς

The word us refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς

Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ

Here They refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: Metonymy)

ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν

Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail”

λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ

Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ

Here, themselves is used for emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

Acts 16:38

ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν

To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 16:40

εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν

Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. The word them refers to the believers in Philippi.

This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: End of Story)

εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν

Here, came can be translated as “went.” (See: Go and Come)

τὴν Λυδίαν

Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia”

ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Here, the brothers refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 17

Acts 17 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: Christ, Messiah)

The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: god, false god, goddess, idol, idolater, idolatrous, idolatry)

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.

Acts 17:1

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.

διοδεύσαντες

Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through”

ἦλθον

Here the word they refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare Acts 16:40.

τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν

Amphipolis and Apollonia are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην

Here, came can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 17:2

κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς

Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was”

ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία

Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks”

διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν

Paul explained what the Scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διελέξατο αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them”

Acts 17:3

διανοίγων

This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: Metaphor)

ἔδει

Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for”

ἀναστῆναι

Alternate translation: “to come back to life”

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.

Acts 17:4

τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: Active or Passive)

προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ

Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul”

σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων

This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.

γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι

Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: Litotes)

Acts 17:5

ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν

Here the word they refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.

ζηλώσαντες

The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: Metaphor)

ζηλώσαντες

It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς

Here, having taken does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.

ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς

The word men here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men”

τῶν ἀγοραίων

The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square”

ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν

Here, the city stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ

This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house”

Ἰάσονος

Jason is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν

Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas”

εἰς τὸν δῆμον

This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob.

Acts 17:6

τινας ἀδελφοὺς

Here, brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”

ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας

Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials”

οἱ…οὗτοι

The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns Those and they to refer to Paul and Silas.

τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες

This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: Idiom)

τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες

The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 17:7

ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες

This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.

Acts 17:8

ἐτάραξαν

Alternate translation: “were worried”

Acts 17:9

λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν

Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.

τῶν λοιπῶν

The words the rest of them refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.

ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς

Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go”

Acts 17:10

Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.

οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ

The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 17:11

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: Background Information)

οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι

These open-minded people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen”

ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον

Here, word refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: Metonymy)

μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας

These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.

καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς

Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”

ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως

Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true”

Acts 17:12

ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι

Here, not a few is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: Litotes)

Acts 17:13

ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες

This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: Metaphor)

ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους

Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset”

Acts 17:14

ἀδελφοὶ

The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν

From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast”

Acts 17:15

καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον

Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul”

Ἀθηνῶν

Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: How to Translate Names)

λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον

This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Acts 17:16

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.

ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου

This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.

παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν

Here, his spirit stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: Synecdoche)

παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 17:17

διελέγετο

This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed”

τοῖς σεβομένοις

This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.

ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ

The marketplace was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square”

Acts 17:18

αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο

Here the words him, He, and he refer to Paul.

τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων

These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: How to Translate Names)

Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων

These Stoic philosophers believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: How to Translate Names)

τινες ἔλεγον

Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said”

τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν?

The word babbler was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ δέ

Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said”

δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι

Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy”

ξένων δαιμονίων

That is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.

Acts 17:19

ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον

This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.

ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον

The Areopagus was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες

Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”

Ἄρειον Πάγον

The Areopagus is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 17:20

ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν

Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: Metaphor)

βουλόμεθα

Here the word we refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν

Here, ears refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 17:21

Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι

The word all is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: Hyperbole)

Ἀθηναῖοι

Here, the Athenians are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: How to Translate Names)

εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν

Here, time is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν

The phrase spent their time in nothing is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: Hyperbole)

λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον

Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”

Acts 17:22

ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ

Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.

κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους

Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.

Acts 17:23

διερχόμενος γὰρ

Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along”

ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ

This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.

Acts 17:24

τὸν κόσμον

In the most general sense, the world refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.

οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος

Here, he is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord”

οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς

The words heaven and earth are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: Merism)

χειροποιήτοις

Here, hands stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 17:25

οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται

Here, served has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων

Here, hands stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: Synecdoche)

αὐτὸς διδοὺς

The word himself is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

Acts 17:26

ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν

Here the word he refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word their refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth.

ἑνὸς

This refers to Adam, the first person God created.

ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν

You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”

Acts 17:27

ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν

Here, to seek God represents desiring to know him, and feel around for him and find him represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: Metaphor)

καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα

Paul uses the negative not far to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: Litotes)

ἡμῶν

In using the word us, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 17:28

Here the words him and his refer to God (Acts 17:24). When Paul says we here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ

Alternate translation: “Because of him”

Acts 17:29

γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ

Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: Metaphor)

τὸ θεῖον

Here, divine being refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: Metonymy)

χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 17:30

οὖν

Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”

τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς

Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance”

χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας

This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.

τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας

Here, all men refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 17:31

ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν

Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”

μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην

Here, world refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: Metonymy)

πίστιν παρασχὼν

Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man”

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.

Acts 17:32

ἀκουσόμεθά

Here the word We refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: End of Story)

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.

ἀκούσαντες

These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.

οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον

These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”

Acts 17:34

Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης

Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: How to Translate Names)

Δάμαρις

Damaris is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 18

Acts 18 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: faithful, faithfulness, trustworthy and Christ, Messiah and repent, repentance)

Acts 18:1

This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.

μετὰ ταῦτα

Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens”

χωρισθεὶς

Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed”

τῶν Ἀθηνῶν

Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.

Acts 18:2

καὶ εὑρών

This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.

τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν

Here the phrase a certain indicates Luke is introducing Aquilla as a new person in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης

Verses 2 and 3 give background information about Aquila and Priscilla. (See: Background Information)

Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει

Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: How to Translate Names)

προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα

This probably happened sometime in the past year.

τῆς Ἰταλίας…τῆς Ῥώμης

Italy is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον

Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.

Acts 18:3

τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι

Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did”

Acts 18:4

διελέγετο δὲ

This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed”

ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας

This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”

Acts 18:5

Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.

Acts 18:6

ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια

This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: Symbolic Action)

τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν

Here, blood stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: Metonymy)

τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν

Here, head refers to the whole person. (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 18:7

εἰσῆλθεν

Here the word he refers to Paul.

Τιτίου Ἰούστου

Titius Justus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν

A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.

Acts 18:8

Κρίσπος

Crispus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀρχισυνάγωγος

The leader of the synagogue was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher.

ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ

Here, house refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: Metonymy)

ἐβαπτίζοντο

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 18:9

μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς

The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: Parallelism)

λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς

The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: Doublet)

μὴ σιωπήσῃς

It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 18:10

λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ

Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”

Acts 18:11

ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: End of Story)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, word of God is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 18:12

τῆς Ἀχαΐας

Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: How to Translate Names)

The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.

Γαλλίωνος

Gallio is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: Synecdoche)

κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν

Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack”

ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα

The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 18:14

ὁ Γαλλίων

Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.

Acts 18:15

νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς

Here, law refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.

κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι

Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”

Acts 18:16

ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος

Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 18:17

ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες

Here the word they probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat (Acts 18:12).

ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες

This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος

This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.

Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον

Sosthenes was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἔτυπτον

Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him”

Acts 18:18

κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν

Here the words He and he refer to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: How to Translate Names)

This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.”

τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος

The word brothers refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας

Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.

κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν

This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a vow. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 18:19

κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν

Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”

διελέξατο

Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with”

Acts 18:20

ἐρωτώντων

Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus.

Acts 18:21

ἀποταξάμενος

Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them”

Acts 18:22

Paul continues his missionary journey.

κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν

The word landed is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea”

ἀναβὰς

He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase gone up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.

ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν

Here, church refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: Metonymy)

κατέβη

The phrase went down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.

Acts 18:23

καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ

This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: Metaphor)

ἐξῆλθεν

Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left”

Φρυγίαν

Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.

Acts 18:24

Ἀπολλῶς

Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: Background Information)

δέ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line.

Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι

The phrase a certain indicates that Luke is introducing Apollos as a new person in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει

Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀνὴρ λόγιος

Alternate translation: “a good speaker”

δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς

He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly”

Acts 18:25

οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι

Here, spirit refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: Synecdoche)

τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου

This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed”

Acts 18:26

Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.

τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: Metaphor)

ἀκριβέστερον

Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully”

Acts 18:27

αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ

Here the he words he and him refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).

διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν

The phrase pass over is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia”

τὴν Ἀχαΐαν

Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ

The word brothers here refers to both men and women believers. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

οἱ ἀδελφοὶ

You can make explicit that the brothers are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς

Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”

τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος

Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”

Acts 18:28

εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ

Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong”

Acts 19

Acts 19 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.

Acts 19:1

ἐγένετο δὲ

This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

Paul travels to Ephesus.

Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον

The upper parts was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.

διελθόντα

Alternate translation: “traveled through”

Acts 19:2

εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε

This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.

οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν

Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit”

Acts 19:3

εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα

You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 19:4

βάπτισμα μετανοίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸν ἐρχόμενον

Here, the one refers to Jesus.

τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν

This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.

Acts 19:5

ἐβαπτίσθησαν

Here, they refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),

ἐβαπτίσθησαν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:6

ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας

He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”

ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον

Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.

Acts 19:7

ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα

This tells how many men were baptized. (See: Background Information)

Acts 19:8

εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς

Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”

διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων

Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”

περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:9

τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν

To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming hardened and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: Metaphor)

κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους

What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase the Way seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: Metaphor and Acts 9:2)

κακολογοῦντες

Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about”

ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου

Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”

Τυράννου

Tyrannus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 19:10

πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, all is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: Hyperbole)

τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:11

δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου

Here, hands stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: Synecdoche)

οὐ τὰς τυχούσας

Alternate translation: “unusual”

Acts 19:12

αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι

Here the words their and them refer to those who were sick.

καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”

καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια

This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.

σουδάρια

The handkerchiefs were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face.

σιμικίνθια

The aprons were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers.

τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας

This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους

Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy”

Acts 19:13

This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.

ἐξορκιστῶν

These exorcists were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.

τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: Metonymy)

τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει

Jesus was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.

τὸν Ἰησοῦν

This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:14

Σκευᾶ

Sceva is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 19:15

τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι

Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”

ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?

The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 19:16

ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν

This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.

αὐτοὺς

Here, them refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.

γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν

The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.

Acts 19:17

ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ ὄνομα

Here, the name stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:19

συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους

The word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books”

ἐνώπιον πάντων

Alternate translation: “in front of everyone”

τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”

μυριάδας πέντε

Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: Numbers)

ἀργυρίου

Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: Biblical Money)

Acts 19:20

This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: End of Story)

οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν

Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 19:21

Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.

ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος

Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he”

ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι

This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.

Ἀχαΐαν

Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.

δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν

Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome”

Acts 19:22

Ἔραστον

Erastus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν

It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν

Here, himself is added for emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

Acts 19:23

Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.

ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος

Luke uses the negative no small to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in Acts 12:18 Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: Litotes)

τῆς ὁδοῦ

This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.

Acts 19:24

Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος

This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: Background Information)

Δημήτριος

Demetrius is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος

The use of the words a certain introduces a new person in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀργυροκόπος

A silversmith is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.

παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν

Luke uses the negative not a little to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: Litotes)

Acts 19:25

τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας

An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”

Acts 19:26

θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι

Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that”

μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον

Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: Metaphor)

λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι

Here the word hands can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 19:27

τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: Active or Passive)

μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς

Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.

ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται

This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: Hyperbole)

ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται

Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 19:28

ἔκραζον

Here they refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).

γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ

This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, anger is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: Metaphor)

ἔκραζον

Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly”

Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.

Acts 19:29

ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως

Here, city refers to the people of the city. (See: Metonymy)

ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως

The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, confusion is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: Metaphor)

ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν

This was a mob or near riot situation.

εἰς τὸ θέατρον

The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.

Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου

These were men who had been with Paul.

Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον

Gaius and Aristarchus are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 19:31

τὸ θέατρον

The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated theater in Acts 19:29.

Acts 19:33

Ἀλέξανδρον

Alexander is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα

You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπολογεῖσθαι

It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”

Acts 19:34

φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων

The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 19:35

The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.

ὁ γραμματεὺς

This town clerk was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town.

τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?

The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὃς οὐ γινώσκει

The town clerk uses not to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: Litotes)

νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος

The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.

τοῦ διοπετοῦς

Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).

Acts 19:36

ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων

Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true”

μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν

Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”

προπετὲς

To be rash is to act without careful thought.

Acts 19:37

τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους

The words these men refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29).

Acts 19:38

οὖν

The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”

ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον

Here having a word against someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀνθύπατοί

The proconsuls were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: Translate Unknowns)

ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις

This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”

Acts 19:39

εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε

Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss”

ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: Active or Passive)

τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ

This regular assembly refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.

Acts 19:40

κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 20

Acts 20 General Notes

Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

Special concepts in this chapter

Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: Metaphor and discipline, self-discipline)

“Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.

Acts 20:1

Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.

μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον

Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot”

ἀσπασάμενος

Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye”

Acts 20:2

παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ

Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers”

Acts 20:3

ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς

This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: Metaphor)

γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν

Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”

Acts 20:4

συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “And traveling with him”

Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ

These are names of places. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Ἀρίσταρχος…Σεκοῦνδος…Γάϊος…Τιμόθεος…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος

These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.

Acts 20:5

προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς

All instances of us in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὗτοι…προσελθόντες

Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us”

Τρῳάδι

Troas is the name of a place. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 20:6

ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν

All instances of we in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων

This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.

Acts 20:7

ἡμῶν

Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’ and Acts 20:4-6)

Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.

κλάσαι ἄρτον

Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: Synecdoche)

παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον

Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak”

Acts 20:8

ὑπερῴῳ

This upper room may have been the third floor of the house.

Acts 20:9

ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος

This window was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it.

Εὔτυχος

Eutychus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ

This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: Metaphor)

κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου

The young man fell asleep, not Paul.

καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός

When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: Active or Passive)

τριστέγου

The third story refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”

Acts 20:11

ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν

Here all occurrences of the word he refer to Paul.

This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.

κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον

Bread was a common food during meals. Here, broken bread probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: Synecdoche)

οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν

Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away”

Acts 20:12

τὸν παῖδα

Here, the boy refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave.

οὐ μετρίως

Luke uses the negative not moderately to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: Litotes)

Acts 20:13

ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες

Here the word we refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες

The word we here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

τὴν Ἆσσον

Assos is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν

Here, himself is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

πεζεύειν

Alternate translation: “to walk”

Acts 20:14

Μιτυλήνην

Mitylene is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 20:15

κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν

Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Χίου

Chios is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: How to Translate Names)

παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον

Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos”

Σάμον

Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: How to Translate Names)

Μίλητον

Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 20:16

κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον

Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι

This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 20:17

μετεκαλέσατο

Here the word he refers to Paul.

Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.

τῆς Μιλήτου

Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in Acts 20:15. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 20:18

ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε

Here, yourselves is used for emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν

Here, foot stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 20:19

δακρύων

Here tears stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: Metonymy)

πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word trials, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate Translation: “while I was tested” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md)

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 20:20

ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν

Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you”

κατ’ οἴκους

Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home”

Acts 20:21

τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡμῶν

The word our refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 20:22

ἐγὼ

Here the word I refers to Paul.

δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς

Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem”

Acts 20:23

δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν

Here, chains refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 20:24

ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

This speaks about Paul’s race and ministry as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν

Here, race and ministry mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: Doublet)

τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου

Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race. (See: Metaphor)

διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ

This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace”

Acts 20:25

καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα

Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know”

ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες

Alternate translation: “I know that all of you”

ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν

Here, kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου

The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 20:26

καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων

Here, blood stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

πάντων

Here all refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 20:27

οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν

Paul uses the negative not hold back to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: Litotes)

Acts 20:28

τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Believers are likened to a flock of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου

The shedding of the blood of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου

Here, blood stands for Christ’s death. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 20:29

εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου

This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 20:30

τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν

A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 20:31

γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες

Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”

γρηγορεῖτε

Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: Metaphor)

μνημονεύοντες ὅτι

Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”

τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν

Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: Hyperbole)

οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not stop, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn”

μετὰ δακρύων

Here, tears refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 20:32

παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: Metonymy)

παρατίθεμαι

To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something.

τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι

A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: Metaphor)

δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν

This speaks about the word of his grace as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: Personification)

τὴν κληρονομίαν

The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 20:33

ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα

Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”

ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς

Here, clothing is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.

Acts 20:34

αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε

The word yourselves is used here to add emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται

The word hands here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 20:35

κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων

Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need”

τῶν ἀσθενούντων

You can state the nominal adjective weak as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀσθενούντων

Alternate translation: “sick”

τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

Here, words refers to what Jesus has said. (See: Metonymy)

μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν

This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.

Acts 20:36

Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.

θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο

It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 20:37

ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου

Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him”

κατεφίλουν αὐτόν

To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.

Acts 20:38

οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν

The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 21

Acts 21 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

Special concepts in this chapter

“They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23).

Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: holy, holiness, unholy, sacred)

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.

Acts 21:1

The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.

ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν

Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ

Alternate translation: “we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”

Κῶ

Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ῥόδον

Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

Πάταρα

Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 21:2

καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην

Here, a ship crossing over stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: Metonymy)

πλοῖον διαπερῶν

Here, crossing does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”

Acts 21:3

ἐπλέομεν

Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον

The left is the “port” side of a boat. Alternate translation: “passed the island on our left”

ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον

Here, ship stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 21:4

οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος

Alternate translation: “These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him”

Acts 21:5

πάντων

Here the word they refers to the believers from Tyre.

ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας

Alternate translation: “when we had finished taking supplies onto the ship”

θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι

It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 21:6

ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους

Alternate translation: “we said goodbye to one another”

Acts 21:7

ἡμεῖς…κατηντήσαμεν…ἐμείναμεν

Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Πτολεμαΐδα

Ptolemais was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς

Alternate translation: “the fellow believers”

Acts 21:8

Καισάρειαν

This begins Paul’s time in Caesarea.

ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ

Here, the seven refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.

εὐαγγελιστοῦ

An evangelist is a person who tells people the good news about Jesus.

Acts 21:9

τούτῳ

Alternate translation: “Philip”

δὲ

The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: Background Information)

θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι

Alternate translation: “four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God”

Acts 21:10

ἐπιμενόντων

Here the word we refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος

This introduces Agabus as a new person in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἅγαβος

Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 21:11

ἡμᾶς

Here the word us refer to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου

Alternate translation: “removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”

τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν.

This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

παραδώσουσιν

Alternate translation: “they will deliver him”

εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν

The word hands here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: Metonymy)

ἐθνῶν

This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 21:12

ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμεῖς

Here the word we refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 21:13

τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?

Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν

To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. (See: Metaphor)

συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν

Here, heart stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: Metonymy)

οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: Active or Passive)

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ

Here, name refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 21:14

μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ πειθομένου

You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “would not be persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: Ellipsis)

τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 21:15

ἀνεβαίνομεν

Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Acts 21:16

παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ

The disciples from Caesarea knew Mnason and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.

Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ

Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: How to Translate Names)

τινι…ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ

This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.

Acts 21:17

Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.

ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί

Here, the brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 21:19

ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον

Alternate translation: “he gave a detailed account of everything”

Acts 21:20

The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.

οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ

Here each instance of the word they refers to James and the elders. The word him refers to Paul.

ἀδελφέ

Here, brother means “fellow believer.”

ὑπάρχουσιν

The word they refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.

Acts 21:21

κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν

Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατηχήθησαν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told the Jewish believers” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως

Here, Moses stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “rebellion against the Law of Moses” or “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: Metonymy)

μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν

To obey the customs is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could walk along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς ἔθεσιν

Alternate translation: “do the things that Jews normally do”

Acts 21:23

λέγομεν

Here the word we refers to James and the elders (Acts 21:18). (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν

This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. Alternate translation: “four men who have made a promise to God”

Acts 21:24

τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς

They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς

The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. Alternate translation: “pay for what they will need” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν

This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: Symbolic Action)

ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: Active or Passive)

στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον

This speaks of obeying the law as if the law were a path and people can walk along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 21:25

ἡμεῖς

Here the word we refers to James and the elders. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν

All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to idols, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in Acts 15:20. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: Active or Passive)

πνικτὸν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: Active or Passive)

πνικτὸν

If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was strangled were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 21:26

παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας

These are the four men who had made a vow.

σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς

Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.

εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν

They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: Synecdoche)

τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ

This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.

ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη…ἡ προσφορά

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 21:27

This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.

αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι

These are the seven days for purification.

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: Synecdoche)

συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον

Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας

Here, laid their hands on means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated laid hands on in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “seized Paul” (See: Idiom)

Acts 21:28

τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου

Alternate translation: “the people of Israel, and the law of Moses, and the temple”

ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 21:29

ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος

This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: Background Information)

Τρόφιμον

Trophimus was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.

Acts 21:30

ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη

The word city represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And the people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη

The word whole here is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου

Alternate translation: “having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul”

εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι

They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. Alternate translation: “the temple doors were immediately shut to protect the temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 21:31

ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης

Here, report refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: Metonymy)

ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ

The phrase came up to is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.

τῷ χιλιάρχῳ

A Roman commander was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.

ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ

The word Jerusalem here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: Metonymy)

ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ

The word all is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: Hyperbole)

Acts 21:32

κατέδραμεν

The word he refers to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.

κατέδραμεν

From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.

τὸν χιλίαρχον

The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.

Acts 21:33

ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”

ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁλύσεσι δυσί

This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.

ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς

You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη

The commander is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.

Acts 21:34

αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν

The first instance of he refers to the commander, and the second he refers to Paul.

ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.

Acts 21:35

ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers had to carry him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 21:36

αἶρε αὐτόν

The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: Euphemism)

Acts 21:37

μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν παρεμβολὴν

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.

τῷ χιλιάρχῳ

The commander was a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers.

Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?

The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 21:38

οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?

The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος

Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας

Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: Numbers)

τῶν σικαρίων

This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.

Acts 21:39

δέομαι…σου

Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you”

ἐπίτρεψόν μοι

Alternate translation: “please allow me” or “please permit me”

Acts 21:40

ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word permission, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν

The word steps here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.

κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ

It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with his hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης

Alternate translation: “And when the people were completely silent”

Acts 22

Acts 22 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26)

Special concepts in this chapter

“In the Hebrew language”

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

“The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

Acts 22:1

Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.

ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες

This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.

ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ

Alternate translation: “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”

Acts 22:2

This verse gives background information. (See: Background Information)

τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ

The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.

Acts 22:3

ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: Active or Passive)

παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ

Here, feet stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: Metonymy)

Γαμαλιήλ

Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.

πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου

This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of our ancestors”

ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ

Alternate translation: “I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”

καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον

Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today”

Acts 22:4

ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα

Here, this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: Metonymy)

ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν

The term this Way was used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated the Way in Acts 9:2.

ἄχρι θανάτου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you could express the same idea with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας

Alternate translation: “tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”

Acts 22:5

μαρτυρεῖ

Alternate translation: “can testify” or “can tell you”

παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος

Alternate translation: “who also gave me letters”

πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν

Here, brothers refers to “fellow Jews.”

ἄξων…τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ

Alternate translation: “to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”

ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 22:6

Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.

ἐγένετο δέ μοι

This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

Acts 22:7

ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι

Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 22:9

τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι

Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 22:10

κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 22:11

οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου

Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”

χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: Active or Passive)

χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι

Here, hands stands for those leading Paul. (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 22:12

Ἁνανίας…τις

The words a certain Ananias are used to introduce Ananias as a new character in the story. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἁνανίας

Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3, you may translate it the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον

Ananias was very serious about following God’s law.

μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having a good reputation among all the Jews who lived there” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 22:13

Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ

Here, brother is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “Saul, my friend”

ἀνάβλεψον

This phrase is an idiom that means “receive your sight.” (See: Idiom)

αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ

This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “at that instant” or “instantly” or “immediately” (See: Idiom)

κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν

This phrase is an idiom that means he received his sight. Alternate translation: “And … I was able to see him” or “And … I saw him” (See: Idiom)

Acts 22:14

ὁ…εἶπεν

The wordhe refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).

Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.

τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “what God is planning and will cause to happen”

ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ

Both voice and mouth refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 22:15

πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους

Here, men means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Acts 22:16

νῦν

Here, now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.

τί μέλλεις?

This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

βάπτισαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου

As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ

Here, name refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”

Acts 22:17

Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.

ἐγένετο δέ μοι

This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει

Alternate translation: “I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision”

Acts 22:18

ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι

Alternate translation: “I saw Jesus as he said to me”

οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ

Alternate translation: “those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”

Acts 22:19

αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται

Here the words they themselves refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.

αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται

The word themselves is used for emphasis. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς

Paul went to the synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue”

Acts 22:20

ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου

Here, blood stands for Stephen’s life. To spill blood means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: Metonymy)

ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 22:22

αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν

Here both instances of the words him refer to Paul.

αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον

The phrase from the earth adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”

Acts 22:23

κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν

The phrase as they were is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.

ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα

These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: Symbolic Action)

Acts 22:24

χιλίαρχος

The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.

ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν παρεμβολήν

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.

εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν

The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. Alternate translation: “ordering that Paul be whipped to force him to tell the truth” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 22:25

προέτειναν

Here the word they refers to the soldiers.

τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν

The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide.

εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?

Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 22:26

τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?

This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 22:27

αὐτῷ…ὁ

Here the words him and he refer to Paul.

προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος

Here, come can be translated as “gone.” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 22:28

ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην

The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome”

ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word citizenship, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι

If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul’s father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!”

Acts 22:29

οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν

Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question”

Acts 22:30

κατηγορεῖται…ἔλυσεν αὐτόν…ἔστησεν

Here the first occurrence of the word he refers to Paul, and the second and third occurrences refer to the chief captain. Both occurrences of the word him refer to Paul.

ἔλυσεν αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “the commander ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds”

καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον

From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts.

Acts 23

Acts 23 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

Special concepts in this chapter

Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: raise, rise, lift, get up, stir up, and reward, prize, deserve)

“Called a curse”

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: Metaphor)

Acts 23:1

Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”

ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας

Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man”

Acts 23:2

Ἁνανίας

Ananias is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 23:3

τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε

This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: Metaphor)

σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι?

Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for strike as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 23:4

τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς?

The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in Acts 23:3. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 23:5

γέγραπται γὰρ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: Active or Passive)

ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς

Paul quotes from the writings of Moses.

Acts 23:6

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers means “fellow Jews.”

υἱὸς Φαρισαίων

Here, son means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”

ἐγὼ κρίνομαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: Active or Passive)

περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the idea as “come back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I have confidence that the dead will come back to life again” (See: Abstract Nouns)

περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

If your language does not use the nominal adjective dead, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 23:7

ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος

Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”

Acts 23:8

Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ λέγουσιν μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα; Φαρισαῖοι δὲ ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα

This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: Background Information)

Acts 23:9

ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη

The word so marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another”

εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος

The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Acts 23:10

πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως

The phrase a great argument can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χιλίαρχος

The commander was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers.

διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: Active or Passive)

διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν

The phrase be torn to pieces might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: Hyperbole)

ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “to use physical force to take him away”

εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.

Acts 23:11

τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ

This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night”

εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι

The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: Ellipsis)

Acts 23:12

While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.

ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν

They formed this conspiracy for the purpose of killing Paul. Alternate translation: “having organized a group with a shared purpose”

ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς

It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 23:13

τεσσεράκοντα οἱ

Alternate translation: “forty men who had become part of” (See: Numbers)

οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι

Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”

Acts 23:14

οἵτινες

Here the word They refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13.

ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον

To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 23:15

ὑμεῖς…ὑμᾶς…μέλλοντας

All instances of you are plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. (See: Forms of You)

ἡμεῖς

Here, we refers to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

νῦν οὖν

Alternate translation: “Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”

νῦν

Here, Now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.

καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”

ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”

Acts 23:16

ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου

Alternate translation: “the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”

ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν

Alternate translation: “hearing that they were ready to ambush Paul” or “finding out that they were waiting to kill Paul”

τὴν παρεμβολὴν

This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.

Acts 23:17

ἔχει…αὐτῷ

Here the word he refers to Paul’s nephew. The word him refers to the chief captain.

Acts 23:18

ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν

Alternate translation: “So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”

ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με

Alternate translation: “The prisoner named Paul after he asked me to come talk with him”

τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν

Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.

Acts 23:20

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο

Here, the Jews does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: Synecdoche)

Παῦλον καταγάγῃς

Alternate translation: “you would bring Paul down from the fortress”

ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ.

Alternate translation: “pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done”

Acts 23:21

ἐνεδρεύουσιν…αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul”

οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”

Acts 23:23

προσκαλεσάμενός

Alternate translation: “having called to himself”

δεξιολάβους διακοσίους

Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: Numbers)

τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός

This was about 9:00 PM.

Acts 23:24

Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα

Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the Roman governor of the area.

Acts 23:25

The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.

Acts 23:26

Κλαύδιος Λυσίας…Φήλικι

Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν

This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν

The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: Ellipsis)

τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι

Alternate translation: “to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”

Acts 23:27

τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews means “some of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “This man was seized by some of the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: Active or Passive)

μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην

Alternate translation: “I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him”

Acts 23:28

κατήγαγον

Here the word I refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.

ἐνεκάλουν αὐτῷ

The word they refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.

Acts 23:29

ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: Active or Passive)

μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words accusation, death, and imprisonment, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 23:30

σέ

The word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: Forms of You)

μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: Active or Passive)

The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.

Acts 23:31

τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα

Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: How to Translate Names)

This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.

οἱ…οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς

The word So marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the commander’s ordering the soldiers to escort Paul.

ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς

Here, brought can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “they got Paul and took him at night”

Acts 23:32

ὑπέστρεψαν

Here, they refers to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.

Acts 23:33

οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες

Here, they refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.

Acts 23:34

ἀναγνοὺς…ἐστὶν…ἀπὸ

Here the first he refers to Governor Felix, and the second and third occurrences of he refer to Paul.

ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν

You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Acts 23:35

ἔφη

This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

διακούσομαί σου

Alternate translation: “I will listen to all you have to say”

κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him”

Acts 24

Acts 24 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

Special concepts in this chapter

Respect

Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Acts 24:1

Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.

μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας

Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”

Ἁνανίας

Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. See how you translated this in Acts 23:1. (See: How to Translate Names)

ῥήτορος

Alternate translation: Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. “a lawyer”

Τερτύλλου τινός

Tertullus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

κατέβη

Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was”

τῷ ἡγεμόνι

Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”

ἐνεφάνισαν τῷ ἡγεμόνι κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου

Alternate translation: “came there to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law”

Acts 24:2

πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες

Here, we refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

σοῦ…σῆς

Here the words you and your refers to Felix, the governor. (See: Forms of You)

καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας

Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation”

Acts 24:3

μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word thankfulness, you could express the same idea with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κράτιστε Φῆλιξ

Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25. Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor”

Acts 24:4

μὴ…ἐνκόπτω

The word we refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω

This could mean: (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”

ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ

Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech”

Acts 24:5

εὑρόντες…τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν

Alternate translation: “we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble”

πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην

The word all here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: Hyperbole)

πρωτοστάτην…τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως

The phrase the sect of the Nazarenes is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “he leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αἱρέσεως

A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.

Acts 24:8

δυνήσῃ αὐτὸς

Here the word you is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: Forms of You)

ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “to learn that we are bringing very serious charges against him” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things of which we are accusing him”

Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.

Acts 24:9

οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders who were at Paul’s trial. (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 24:10

Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.

νεύσαντος…τοῦ ἡγεμόνος

Alternate translation: “and the governor gestured”

κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ

Here, this nation refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: Metonymy)

εὐθύμως…ἀπολογοῦμαι

Alternate translation: “I gladly explain my situation”

Acts 24:12

εὗρόν

Here the word they refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.

ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου

Alternate translation: “and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome”

Acts 24:14

ὁμολογῶ…τοῦτό σοι

Alternate translation: “I acknowledge this to you”

ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν

The phrase the Way was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.

λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν

A sect is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated sect in Acts 24:5.

οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ

Paul uses the phrase in that way to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a sect or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.

Acts 24:15

καὶ αὐτοὶ

Here, these men refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men”

ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων

These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and unrighteous people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Acts 24:16

αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός

Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best”

ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν

Here, conscience refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: Metonymy)

πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν

Alternate translation: “in the presence of God”

Acts 24:17

δὲ

The word Now marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.

δι’ ἐτῶν…πλειόνων

Alternate translation: “after many years away from Jerusalem”

ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς

Here, I came can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift to the poor” (See: Go and Come)

Acts 24:18

ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Alternate translation: “in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”

οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου

You can state this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 24:20

αὐτοὶ

Here, these refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.

αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα

Alternate translation: “let these men prove what I did wrong”

Acts 24:21

περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you can express the same idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 24:22

ὁ Φῆλιξ

Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς Ὁδοῦ

Here, the Way is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.

Λυσίας

Lysias is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.

καταβῇ

Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming down from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “may come down from Jerusalem”

διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”

Acts 24:23

ἔχειν…ἄνεσιν

Alternate translation: “to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”

Acts 24:24

μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς

Alternate translation: “But after several days”

Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ ἰδίᾳ γυναικὶ

Drusilla is a woman’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ

A Jewess refers to a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 24:25

ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ

Felix may have been frightened because he felt conviction of his sins.

τὸ νῦν ἔχον

Alternate translation: “Leave me for a while”

Acts 24:26

χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου

Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.

διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “and so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”

Acts 24:27

ἔλαβεν διάδοχον ὁ Φῆλιξ Πόρκιον Φῆστον

Porcius Festus was the new roman governor who succeeded Felix. Alternate translation: “Porcius Festus replaced Felix as the governor” (See: How to Translate Names)

θέλων…χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις

Here, the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: Synecdoche)

ὁ Φῆλιξ…κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον

Alternate translation: “Felix kept Paul in prison”

Acts 25

Acts 25 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Favor

This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: favor, favorable, favoritism)

Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.

Acts 25:1

Φῆστος

Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.

οὖν

The word then marks the beginning of a new event in the story.

Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ

This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.

ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας

The phrase went up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.

Acts 25:2

παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν

Here the word him refers to Festus.

Acts 25:3

χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ

Here the word him refers to Paul.

ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ

This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”

ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν

They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.

Acts 25:4

Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι

You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Acts 25:5

οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες

Alternate translation: “He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”

εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον

Alternate translation: “If Paul has done anything wrong”

κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”

Acts 25:6

διατρίψας…καταβὰς…ἐκέλευσεν…ἀχθῆναι

Here all occurrences of the word he and him refer to Festus.

καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν

Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.

καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος

Here, judgment seat refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:7

παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “And when he came and stood before Festus”

πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες

Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 25:8

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν

Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 25:9

θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι

Here, the Jews means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς

Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.

ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:10

ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι

The judgment seat refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:11

εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι

Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι

Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for judgment.

ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι

Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”

εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου

Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true”

οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι

This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.

Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι

Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”

Acts 25:12

μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου

This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as council throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”

Acts 25:13

Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη

King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη

Agrippa is a man and Bernice is a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

δὲ

This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.

ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον

Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus”

Acts 25:14

Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.

ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: Active or Passive)

Φήλικος

Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.

Acts 25:15

περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν

To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: Metaphor)

αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word judgment, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 25:16

χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον

Here, hand over represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: Metaphor)

πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους

Here, have his accusers face to face is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: Idiom)

Acts 25:17

οὖν

Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”

συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε

Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”

καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος

Here, judgment seat refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:19

τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας

Here, religion means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.

Acts 25:20

κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:21

τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:22

αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ

The phrase he says can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Acts 25:23

τοῦ Ἀγρίππα καὶ τῆς Βερνίκης

Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.

μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας

Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them”

τὸ ἀκροατήριον

This hall was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.

ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 25:24

ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων

The word all is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: Hyperbole)

μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι

This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: Litotes)

Acts 25:25

αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν

Alternate translation: “but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”

τὸν Σεβαστὸν

The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.

Acts 25:26

ὑμῶν…σοῦ

Here the first you is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in 25:24. The second you is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: Forms of You)

προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα

Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”

ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω

Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”

Acts 25:27

ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unreasonable … not, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: Double Negatives)

τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας

This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.

Acts 26

Acts 26 General Notes

Structure and formatting

This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22)

Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.

Special concepts in this chapter

Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Acts 26:1

Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.

Ἀγρίππας

Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.

ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα

Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”

ἀπελογεῖτο

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word defense, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 26:2

ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον

Paul said he was blessed because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.

ἀπολογεῖσθαι

Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”

περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 26:3

ζητημάτων

You can make explicit what kinds of controversies Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 26:4

πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι

This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου

This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.

Acts 26:5

τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας

Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”

Acts 26:6

νῦν

The word Now marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.

ἕστηκα κρινόμενος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ

This speaks about a promise as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 26:7

εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι

The phrase our 12 tribes stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι

This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: Metaphor)

νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον

The extremes night and day mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: Merism)

ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 26:8

τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει?

Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

νεκροὺς ἐγείρει

Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”

Acts 26:9

μὲν οὖν

Paul uses the word Then to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.

πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία

The word name here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 26:10

ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase were being put to death in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 26:11

πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς

This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.

Acts 26:12

ἐν οἷς

Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.

ἐν οἷς

The word While is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.

μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς

Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.

Acts 26:14

ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με

Here, voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: Metonymy)

Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?

This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-rquestion/01.md)

σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν

For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or goad) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 26:18

ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν

Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open their eyes. (See: Metaphor)

ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς

Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: Metaphor)

ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν

Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κλῆρον

The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father. (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ

Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: Metaphor)

πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ

Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me”

Acts 26:19

ὅθεν

Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”

οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not disobedient, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: Double Negatives)

τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ

This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 26:20

ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν

To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: Metaphor)

ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 26:21

Ἰουδαῖοι

Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: Synecdoche)

Acts 26:22

μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ

Here, small and great are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-merism/01.md)

οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν

You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”

ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται

Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.

Acts 26:23

εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός

You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

Alternate translation: “to be brought back to life”

νεκρῶν

The phrase the dead refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.

φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν

To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 26:24

μαίνῃ

Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”

τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει

Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”

Acts 26:25

οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative not insane, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: Double Negatives)

κράτιστε Φῆστε

Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors”

Acts 26:26

ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν

Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ

Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”

πείθομαι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: Active or Passive)

λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ…οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο

Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: Litotes)

λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν γωνίᾳ

This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in a corner of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: Metaphor)

Acts 26:27

πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?

Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 26:28

ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι

Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Acts 26:29

παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων

Here, these chains stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 26:30

ἥ…Βερνίκη

Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).

ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν

Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”

Acts 26:31

οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word death, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος

Here, chains stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 26:32

ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27

Acts 27 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Sailing

People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.

Trust

Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: trust, trusted, trustworthy, trustworthiness)

Paul breaks bread

Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.

Acts 27:1

Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.

ὡς…ἐκρίθη

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν

Italy was the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated Italy in Acts 18:2.

παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς

Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”

παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας

This could mean: (1) they refers to the governor and the king or (2) they refers to other Roman officials.

ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ

Julius is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

σπείρης Σεβαστῆς

The Augustan regiment was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:2

Ἀδραμυντηνῷ

Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν

Here, a ship … being about to sail stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: Metonymy)

ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν

The words we and us include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ

This could mean: (1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.

μέλλοντι πλεῖν

Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon”

ἀνήχθημεν

Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea”

Ἀριστάρχου

Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.

Acts 27:3

κατήχθημεν

Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος

See how you translated Julius in Acts 27:1. Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern”

πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word care, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Acts 27:4

ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν

Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under”

ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον

Here, under Cyprus means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.

Acts 27:5

Παμφυλίαν

Pamphylia was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.

κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας

You can make explicit that they got off the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς Μύρρα

Myra is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς Λυκίας

Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:6

εὑρὼν…πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν

It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἀλεξανδρῖνον

Alexandria is the name of a city. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:7

δὲ…βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι

You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον

Cnidus was an ancient settlement located in what today is modern-day Turkey. (See: How to Translate Names)

μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου

Alternate translation: “with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”

ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην

Alternate translation: “we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”

κατὰ Σαλμώνην

Salmone is a coastal city in Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:8

μόλις…παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν

You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Καλοὺς Λιμένας

Fair Havens was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

πόλις ἦν Λασαία

Lasea was a coastal city in Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:9

ἱκανοῦ…χρόνου διαγενομένου

Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.

ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι

This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.

Acts 27:10

θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας…μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν

Alternate translation: “if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”

ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν

Here, loss means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.

οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου

The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”

Acts 27:11

ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:12

ἀνευθέτου…τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν

You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: Active or Passive)

λιμένος

A harbor is a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there.

Φοίνικα

Phoenix is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

παραχειμάσαι

This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: Metaphor)

βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον

This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”

κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον

These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. The southwest is a little to the left of the setting sun, and northwest is a little to the right of the setting sun.

Acts 27:13

ἄραντες

Here, weighed anchor means to pull the anchor out of the water. An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.

Acts 27:14

μετ’ οὐ πολὺ

Alternate translation: “after a little while”

ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς

Alternate translation: “a very strong, dangerous wind”

ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων

The word for northeaster in the original language is Euroclydon. You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς

Alternate translation: “came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”

Acts 27:15

συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ

Alternate translation: “And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”

ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:16

νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες

Alternate translation: “sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”

νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα

This island of Cauda was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: How to Translate Names)

τῆς σκάφης

A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.

Acts 27:17

ἣν ἄραντες

Alternate translation: “When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”

βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον

They tied ropes around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.

τὴν Σύρτιν

Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: How to Translate Names)

χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος

A sea anchor was a sail or other object that would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow down the ship from going where the wind was blowing them.

ἐφέροντο

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:18

σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο

Here, they is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.

ἐκβολὴν

The word cargo refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”

Acts 27:19

αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν

Here, equipment refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.

Acts 27:20

μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας

They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.

χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου

Alternate translation: “as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”

λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:21

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης

It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people on the ship”

κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν

Alternate translation: “and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”

Acts 27:22

ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν

Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου

Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”

Acts 27:24

Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι

The phrase stand before Caesar refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: Metonymy)

κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ

Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”

Acts 27:25

καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:26

εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν

Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”

Acts 27:27

ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο

The ordinal number fourteenth can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

διαφερομένων ἡμῶν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ

The Adriatic Sea is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 27:28

βολίσαντες

They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”

εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι…εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε

A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: Numbers)

Acts 27:29

ἀγκύρας

An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.

ἐκ πρύμνης

Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship”

Acts 27:30

τὴν σκάφην

A lifeboat is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.

ἐκ πρῴρης

Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship”

Acts 27:31

ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative unless … not able, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: Double Negatives)

ὑμεῖς

Here the word you is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: Forms of You)

ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε

If your language does not use the passive form be saved in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:33

ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι

Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise”

τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν

The ordinal number fourteenth can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Acts 27:34

οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται

This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: Idiom)

Acts 27:35

κλάσας

Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”

Acts 27:36

εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 27:37

ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ

This is background information about the number of people on the ship. (See: Background Information)

Acts 27:39

κόλπον

A bay is a large area of water partly surrounded by land, but open to a larger body of water.

τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον

Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”

Acts 27:40

τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων

Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”

τῶν πηδαλίων

These rudders were large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering the ship.

τὸν ἀρτέμωνα

A “sail” was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. A foresail is the said at the front of a ship that had more than one sail. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship”

κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν

Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach”

Acts 27:41

περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον

Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.

πρῷρα

Alternate translation: “front of the ship”

ἡ…πρύμνα

Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”

Acts 27:42

τῶν…στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο

Alternate translation: “the soldiers were planning”

Acts 27:43

ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος

Alternate translation: “kept them from doing what they planned to do”

ἀπορίψαντας

Alternate translation: “having jumped off the ship into the water”

Acts 27:44

οὓς…ἐπὶ σανίσιν

Alternate translation: “some on wooden boards”

Acts 28

Acts 28 General Notes

Structure and formatting

No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.

Special concepts in this chapter

“Letters” and “brothers”

The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.

When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“He was a god”

The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.

Acts 28:1

τότε ἐπέγνωμεν

Here the word we refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.

καὶ διασωθέντες

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: Active or Passive)

Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται

Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 28:2

οἵ…βάρβαροι

Alternate translation: “the local people”

παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν

Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν

This phrase is uses a negative to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: Litotes)

ἅψαντες…πυρὰν

Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”

προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς

This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”

Acts 28:3

ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα

Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”

καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”

Acts 28:4

πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος

Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”

ἡ δίκη

The word justice refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 28:5

ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ

Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”

ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν

Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all”

Acts 28:6

πίμπρασθαι

This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.

μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον

If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative nothing unusual, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: Double Negatives)

μεταβαλόμενοι

To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: Metaphor)

ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν

You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν

Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.

Acts 28:7

ἡμᾶς…ἐξένισεν

Here both instance of the word us refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον

Now is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.

τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου

This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.

ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ

Publius is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 28:8

ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι

This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: Background Information)

πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: Active or Passive)

δυσεντερίῳ

“Dysentery” is an infectious intestinal disease.

ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “having touched him with his hands”

Acts 28:9

ἐθεραπεύοντο

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 28:10

πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς

Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.

Acts 28:11

παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ

Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season”

ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ

This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.

Διοσκούροις

The Heavenly Twins refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Acts 28:12

Συρακούσας

Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 28:13

Ῥήγιον

Rhegium was a port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐπιγενομένου νότου

Alternate translation: “when the wind began to blow from the south”

Ποτιόλους

Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 28:14

οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς

Alternate translation: “When we met fellow believers there”

ἀδελφοὺς

These brothers were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

παρεκλήθημεν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν

Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”

Acts 28:15

ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν

Alternate translation: “after they heard why we were there”

εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος

Here, courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: Metaphor)

Ἀππίου Φόρου…Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν

Forum of Appius and Three Taverns were a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: How to Translate Names)

Acts 28:16

Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.

εἰσήλθομεν

Here the word we refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 28:17

ἐγένετο δὲ

This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.

τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους

These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.

ἀδελφοί

Here brothers means “fellow Jews.”

ἐναντίον…τῷ λαῷ

Alternate translation: “against our people” or “against the Jews”

ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων

Here, hands stands for power or control. (See: Metonymy)

Acts 28:18

τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί

Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”

Acts 28:19

τῶν Ἰουδαίων

Here, the Jews does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀντιλεγόντων

Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”

ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν

Here, my nation stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 28:20

τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ

This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.

τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι

Here, bound with this chain stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: Metonymy)

τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ

Here, Israel stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 28:21

ἡμεῖς

Here, We refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: Acts 28:17 and Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Here, brothers stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”

Acts 28:22

τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης

A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”

γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: Active or Passive)

πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 28:23

ταξάμενοι…οἷς…αὐτοὺς

Here all occurrences of the words they and them refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.

ταξάμενοι…αὐτῷ ἡμέραν

Alternate translation: “when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”

διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, kingdom of God stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: Metonymy)

τῶν προφητῶν

Here, the prophets refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: Metonymy)

Acts 28:24

καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις

If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: Active or Passive)

Acts 28:25

εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν

Here, word stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: Metonymy)

καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν

This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Acts 28:26

πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε

In this verse, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.

λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε

This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε

The words hear and see are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”

καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: Parallelism)

Acts 28:27

Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.

ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου

People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. (See: Metaphor)

ἡ καρδία

Here, heart is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” (See: Metonymy)

τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν

People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will not see. (See: Metaphor)

τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν

Here, heart stands for the mind. (See: Metonymy)

ἐπιστρέψωσιν

To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God. (See: Metaphor)

ἰάσομαι αὐτούς

This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.

Acts 28:28

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ

God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: Active or Passive)

αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται

This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen”

Acts 28:30

In verses 30-31, Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: End of Story)

Acts 28:31

κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, kingdom of God refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: Metonymy)